You are on page 1of 446

Important safety instructions

 Observe the general and press-specific safety


instructions in the operating manual.

 At first start-up or after the exchange of


equipment or components check the correct
functioning of all safety equipment.

 Control cabinet and machine housing have to be


locked while the press is in operation. They may
only be opened for repair purposes.

 Make sure that the main power switch is turned


off and that there is no voltage applied to the press
before you open the control cabinet or the machine
housing.

 If it is necessary to repair the press while it is


connected to the mains supply, please pay attention
to general safety precautions.

 Never exchange components and units while the


press is connected to the mains supply.

 Safety equipment must not be modified. Do not


remove earth conductors. If it is necessary to
disconnect these conductors, please remember to
reconnect them after you are finished.

 If extra accessories not corresponding to


Heidelberg specifications are installed or mounted,
Heidelberg does not accept any liability whatsoever.
In each case these accessories must be controlled
or locked in a way that no hazards can arise when
the press and its devices are operated.
Observe these handling instructions when
Attention: you replace electronic boards with electro-
statically sensitive devices (ESDs)!

Handling and replacing electronic boards

+80°C

–25°C

Storage: ALWAYS NEVER NEVER


NEVER below –25°C pack into the protec- replace when power is use force to insert.
NEVER above +80°C tive container for on.
ESDs.

Protective measures for ESDs


to be observed when replacing electronic boards

DISCHARGE UNPACK REPLACE PACK


static charges. from the protective electronic boards. into the protective
container for ESDs. container for ESDs.
2. Speedmaster CD102 Table of contents

2. Speedmaster CD 102 1 – 438

7 Main drive
7 M1 Direct-current main motor
12 M1 Brushless main motor

17 Pile centering
17 Block diagram
19 11B10 Pile centering
21 11M9 Pile centering
28 11B55 Inactivating pile centering

31 Pile merging
31 11M8 Adjustment of pile support plate

39 Suction head height control


39 11M5 Suction head height adjustment

45 Size adjustment
45 Block diagram
47 11M4 Adjustment of format wheels
53 11M6 Suction head/format adjustment
59 11M11/11M12 Pile stops D.S./O.S.
67 1M4 Cover guide height adjustment
77 1M2/1M3 Print-free margin D.S./O.S.
85 1...nM5 Adjustment of printing pressure
96 1M7/1M8 Adjustment of pull lays
104 12M5 Sheet slowdown/format adjustment
110 12M6/12M7 Sheet joggers D.S./O.S.

1
2. Speedmaster CD102 Table of contents

119 Feeder pile control


119 Block diagrams
121 Layout
124 Overview of components
127 Function
140 11M1 Main pile motor (Preset)
143 11M1 Main pile motor (standard)
146 11M2 Auxiliary pile motor
149 11B11 Auxiliary pile detection
152 11B33 Upper main pile limitation
155 11B35 Automatic pile transport
158 11S34 Bottom main pile limitation

161 Delivery pile control


161 Block diagrams
163 Layout
166 Overview of components
170 Function
186 12M1 Main pile motor (Preset)
189 12M1 Main pile motor (standard)
192 12M2 Auxiliary pile motor
195 12B65 Changeover fast/slow
198 12B69 Pile height control
201 12B129 Delivery upper edge of pile
204 12S34 Bottom main pile limitation

207 Sheet alignment


207 Block diagram
210 1B13/ 1B49 Sheet alignment control
223 1B9/1B10 Pull lay control
231 1B11 Double-sheet detector
238 11M3 Automatic sheet arrival control
241 11M3 Automatic sheet arrival control (standard version)
247 11M3 Automatic sheet arrival control (Preset version)
251 11M7 Automatic misalignment control

2
2. Speedmaster CD102 Table of contents

259 Sheet monitoring


259 1...nB48/ 1...nB48a Sheet travel monitor

267 Plate clamping device


267 Autoplate
271 1...nB53 ”Coarse register monitoring”

275 Washup devices


275 Control by command ”Washup”
276 Messages
278 Service display ”Washup”
281 Blanket washup device (GTW)
286 Inking roller washup device (FWW)
292 Impression cylinder washup device (DZW)
296 M43, M50 ... M56 Washup brush motors
297 E9 Washup solution container
301 B1, B54, B55 Sensors at the washup solution container
303 1...nB43 Monitoring the ink blade

305 Inking unit


305 Servo-drive ink fountain roller
308 Servo-drive diagonal register 1...nM6
311 Servo-drive lateral register
314 Servo-drive circumferential register
317 Inking unit temperature control
318 E39 Inking unit temperature control

321 Dampening
321 1...nM1 Pan roller motors
322 1...nM45 Blower motor for dampening system
323 1...nB32 Sensor ”Dampening solution control”
325 E40 Central dampening solution supply /
cooling and circulating unit
328 E41 Dampening solution mixing unit

3
2. Speedmaster CD102 Table of contents

329 Central lubrication


329 Basic concept
330 Service display
332 Fault messages
333 Grease lubrication
338 Oil lubrication
343 M44 Oil pump
345 12M47 Motor for grease lubrication
346 1F33 Pressure monitoring oil lubrication 1 bar
347 1F34 Pressure monitoring oil lubrication 12 bars
348 12B47 Lubrication monitoring 1 and
12B77 Lubrication monitoring 2

351 Pneumatic system


351 15Y11 Admission of pressure, pneumatic system
353 15B14 Pressure sensor ”Pneumatic system”
355 E4 Pneumatic system compressor

357 Suction and blast air


357 1M9 Blast air regulation at the feeder

369 Other components


369 E4a Varnish supply unit
371 L-B32 Level in coating pan
373 12E2 Powder spray unit
377 12M35 Blower motor for powder spray device
379 12S68 Switch ”Powdering cycle”
380 12S9, -a, -b, -c Monitoring the IR slide-in dryer
381 E8 Air supply cabinet
382 E39 Inking unit temperature control
383 12E3 Static electricity eliminator
386 WSA Intercom
388 IDS Encoder

4
2. Speedmaster CD102 Table of contents

393 Location diagrams


393 ZSG Central control cabinet
408 ZSP Central control console
409 Position switches
411 Solenoid valves
413 Motors
415 Sensors
417 Control panels
423 Operator’s controls
429 ZSP Control panel of control console

431 Abbreviations

435 Equipment identification

437 Position codes

5
2. Speedmaster CD102 Table of contents

6
Main drive M1 Direct-current main motor

Main drive

M1 Direct-current main motor

Layout
The dc main motor is a dc shunt motor. Its layout
varies depending on the manufacturer, motor
power and type of construction.
The illustration below shows one example of the
components of the main motor M1.

Representation of a dc main motor M1

 Installation area of fan impeller


 Ventilation cover
 Terminal box for main motor M1
( contains all connections for M1 )
 Hoop for manual release of brake
 Terminal box of brake
 Brake Y1
 Installation area of carbon brushes and
commutator
 Motor support rails or motor baseplate

7
Main drive M1 Direct-current main motor

Attention: Make sure the motor is disconnected from


the power supply before working on it!
Make certain to leave a minimum gap of
6 mm in the terminal box between neighbour-
ing conducting parts carrying different
potentials!
Shut the terminal box tight!

Terminal box of ”SIEMENS” main motor


 Entries for motor connecting cables
 Connection PE conductor
 Connection armature circuit + / A1
 Connection armature circuit – / A2
 Connection field circuit + / F1
 Connection field circuit – / F2
 Connector X1 / connection to optocoupler
module 15U5 (monitoring of carbon brushes)
and brake control module BAM ( BAM-X1)
 Connector X2 / connection to interference
suppressor module ESM ( motor coding )
Connecting cable to brake Y1

Terminal box of a ”SIEMENS” main motor

Terminal box of ”BAUMÜLLER” main motor


 Connection PE conductor
 Connector X1 / connection to optocoupler
module 15U5 (monitoring of carbon brushes)
and brake control module BAM ( BAM-X1)
 Connector X2 / connection to interference
suppressor module ESM ( motor coding )
 Connection field circuit – / F2
 Connection field circuit + / F1
 Connection armature circuit + / A1
 Connection armature circuit – / A2
 Entries for motor connecting cables

Terminal box of a ”BAUMÜLLER” main motor

8
Main drive M1 Direct-current main motor

Removal and installation of brake


 Connecting cable of brake
 Terminal box of brake
 Fixing bolts of brake
 Brake of main motor M1

Removal of defective brake


 Turn off the main switch on the central control
cabinet ZSG and make sure no-one can turn
the power back on.
 Disconnect the connecting cable  from the
terminal box  of the brake.
 Loosen the fixing bolts  of the brake.
 Pull the brake off the main motor shaft.

Brake at main motor

 Connecting cable of brake


 Terminal box of brake
 Fixing bolts of brake
 Brake of main motor M1
 Square driver of motor shaft

Installation of the new brake


 Place the new brake on the square driver  of
the motor shaft.
  uniformly.
Tighten the fixing bolts
 Connect the connecting cable  of the brake
to the terminal box .

Main motor with brake removed

9
Main drive M1 Direct-current main motor

Removal/installation of carbon brushes


 Ventilation covers of main motor
 Terminals of carbon brushes
 Carbon brushes
 Clamp-type carbon brush holder
 Brush-rocker ring

Removal of carbon brushes

Note:
Always replace all carbon brushes of the
main motor.
All carbon brushes should be from the same set of
spare parts to guarantee that they are all from the
same material.

Ventilation covers of main motor 1 Turn off the main switch on the central
control cabinet ZSG and make sure no-one
can turn the power back on.
2 Remove all ventilation covers  on the
installation side of the brake.
3 Disconnect the wires of the carbon brushes
from the terminals .

Note:
With certain motors it is necessary to turn the
brush-rocker ring  for brush removal.
Before turning the brush-rocker ring , mark
its position in relation to the stator ( e.g.
colour line ) if no markings exist so far.
4 Loosen the retaining screws  ( but do not
turn them out completely ) and turn the
brush-rocker ring  ( see illustration on next
page).
5 Flip up the clamp-type brush holder  and
take out all used carbon brushes .
Layout of brush-rocker ring (example)

10
Main drive M1 Direct-current main motor

 Carbon brush connections


 Carbon brushes
 Clamp-type carbon brush holder
 Brush-rocker ring
 Fixing bolts for brush-rocker ring

Installation of new carbon brushes


When replacing a set of carbon brushes, clean all
the cooling-air paths, e.g. with dry, oil-free
compressed air. Any deposits of carbon dust on
the insulating parts of the commutator and the
brush-rocker ring must be removed completely,
e.g. by cleaning these parts with a non-linting
cloth.

 Insert the new carbon brushes  and


connect them to the terminals. Close the
clamp-type brush holder .
Fastening the brush-rocker ring (example)
Note:
The carbon brushes must rest correctly on
the commutator and run smoothly in the
brush boxes.
 If the brush-rocker ring  was turned
before, it must be brought back in its initial
position and locked after replacement of the
carbon brushes. Pay attention to the
markings!
 Screw down the covers  again.
Note:
The ventilation slots in the ventilation covers
must point downward to maintain the type of
protection.

11
Main drive M1 Brushless main motor

M1 Brushless main motor

Construction with terminal board (from 37kW)

Á
Á

Main motor M1 with terminal box

 Motor shaft
 Terminal box of main motor
 Terminal box of brake
 Rotor position encoder
 Plug of rotor position encoder
 Lever for manual release of the brake

12
Main drive M1 Brushless main motor

Rotor position encoder


The rotor position encoder consists of three
components:
– sensor,
– rotating part,
– adjusting ring.

Attention: Do not loosen the safety screws of the adjusting


ring of the rotor position encoder!
Displacement of the adjusting ring results in
displacement of the rotor position encoder in
relation to the actual position of the rotor of the
main motor.
If the adjusting ring is not in its normal position
or defective, the main motor must be replaced!

Layout
 Pin base X2 / connection to BLT4
 Safety screws of adjusting ring
 Sensor

ÁÁÁÁ  Adjusting ring

ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ

Front view of rotor position encoder

Pin assignment
X2 2 X2 Plug connection to ZSG (BLT4)
1 3
7 Pin Function
6 4
5 6 DC +15 V
7  15 V
Pin base X2, 7-pole

13
Main drive M1 Brushless main motor

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ

Rotor position encoder of main motor M1

 Motor casing / brake


 Adjusting ring
 End-float washers (not always provided)
 Motor shaft
 Rotating part
 Connector M1-X2
 Sensor part

Removal
1 Turn off the main switch and make sure
no-one can turn the power back on.
2 Remove connector X2.
3 Remove the sensor (four fixing bolts).
4 Replace the sensor or rotating part.

Note:
Put the end-float washers back in place
between the rotating part and motor.
Installation
5 Reinstall all parts and connect the rotor
position encoder.

14
Main drive M1 Brushless main motor

Connection
Main motors with < 37 kW are connected by
means of prefabricated plugs.
For EMC reasons, main motors with 37 KW or
more are connected via a terminal board.

 PE conductor connection
 Motor winding W (threaded bolt M12)
 Motor winding V (threaded bolt M10)
 Motor winding U (threaded bolt M8)
 PE conductor connection
 Plug for motor code, brake and tempera-
ture sensor

Terminal box of main motor BAUMÜLLER 37KW

Please note:
The terminal studs of the motor terminal board
and the eye rings of the connecting cables have
different diameters. Thus the cables cannot be
mixed up.
Terminal N is used for measuring purposes only.

Pin assignment
X1 Plug connection in motor terminal box

Pin Function
1 5 2 6
1 Motor code 0
2 Motor code 1
3  Motor code
1 5
2 6 4 Temperature sensor
5 Brake +

Pin and socket bases, 6-pole 6 Brake –

15
Main drive M1 Brushless main drive

16
Pile centering Block diagram

Pile centering

Block diagram
The pile centering function comprises:
Pile centering Inactivating
11B10 pile centering – the sensor ”Pile centering” 11B10,
11B55 – the sensor ”Inactivating pile centering” 11B55”,
– the servo-drive ”Pile centering” 11M9”.
Pile centering
The pile centering function compensates for the
11M9
lateral displacement of the paper pile at the feeder.
The sensor ”Pile centering” 11B10 senses the lateral
edge of the pile. The required distance between the
M
sensor and the lateral pile edge is 130 " 2 mm. If
the difference between the required and actual
distance exceeds the tolerance limits, the electronic
SSM1 SSM1 control system corrects the position of the paper pile
through the servo-drive ”Pile centering” 11M9”.

If the pile support plate reaches the sensor ”Inactivat-


ing pile centering” 11B35 during its upward move-
SSK EAK 1 ment, the electronic control system stops the
automatic control.

Automatic control is resumed as soon as


– the pile support plate is below the sensor 11B35
and
SAK ESK
– the sensors 11B10 and 11B35 detect paper or
– the pile support plate lies on the floor
(position switch 11S34 actuated).

REK1 REK386

DSK

DNK SVM

MID11 MID12
ZID
Displays

Legend: Data line


Control lines

Block diagram for pile centering

17
Pile centering Block diagram

Activating and inactivating pile centering

Selecting the display

 Symbol ”Pile centering on / off”


Activating and inactivating pile centering:
– in the preselection display,
– by means of the function button.

If the symbol is lit, pile centering is active.

 
  
  
  

18
Pile centering 11B10 Pile centering

11B10 Pile centering


The sensor 11B10:
– senses the lateral pile edge (actual distance),
– with the required distance = 130 ± 2 mm.

Á 11B10

Á
Where?

Á
– approx. 25 mm below the upper edge of the pile.

Á Automatic control through the electronic control

Á system:

Á
130 ± 2 mm
– if the difference between the required distance
and actual distance exceeds the tolerance limits,
– by activating the servo-drive ”Pile centering”
Required distance for pile centering 11M9.

No automatic control:
– within the tolerance limits of the required
distance.

Output signal of sensor 11B10:


– analog voltage,
– digitization on the SSK1.

Signal flow:
– Sensor 11B10
– Servo-drive distributor module (11LVT: 2SSM1)
– backplane SSR: X14
– servo-drive control board SSK1.

19
Pile centering 11B10 Pile centering

Place of installation

11B10

PU1 and Preset feeder

Removal and installation

11LVT1
black
2SSM1
X5: D4
X2: +8
X2: –8

blue
brown

Check

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ 1646 ± 70

130  2 mm

20
Pile centering 11M9 Pile centering

11M9 Pile centering

Automatic positioning
Condition:
Automatic pile centering is switched on in the
preselection display.

The servo-drive 11M9 positions the pile support


frame at the feeder.

The sensor 11B10 senses the lateral edge of the


pile. If the difference between the required distance
and the actual distance exceeds the tolerance
limits, the servo-drive control board SSK regulates
the servo-drive 11M9.

If the pile support plate reaches the sensor 11B35


while moving up, the electronic control system
stops the automatic control.

Manual positioning for feeder without


NON-STOP facility:
Condition:
Automatic pile centering is switched off in the
preselection display.

Pushbuttons The pushbuttons Main pile centering control the


”Main pile centering” servo-drive 11M9.
Maximum positioning range: +/– 30 mm in relation
Plus button to the centre of the feeder.

Minus button Plus button = movement towards D.S.


Minus button = movement towards O.S.

21
Pile centering 11M9 Pile centering

NON-STOP feeder
The positioning of the pile support plate by means
of pushbuttons depends on the position of the
toggle switch ”Auxiliary pile on/off”.

ÁÁÁ    
   

ÁÁÁ
Toggle switch
ON - Main pile control activated.

ÁÁÁ
”Auxiliary pile on / off”
OFF - The pushbuttons ”Main pile centering” control
the servoĆdrive.
Pushbuttons – Maximum positioning range:
”Main pile centering” ± 35mm in relation to the centre of the feeder.
Plus button Plus button = movement towards D.S.
Minus button = movement towards O.S.
Minus button
The pile support frame and pile support plate can
move max. 35 mm in the same direction together.

Toggle switch in position ”ON”:


Toggle switch ON – Auxiliary pile control activated.
”Auxiliary pile on / off”
OFF – The pushbuttons ”Auxiliary pile centering”
control the pile support frame.
Pushbuttons
”Auxiliary pile centering” – Maximum positioning range:
± 35mm in relation to the centre of the feeder.
Plus button
The pile support frame and pile support plate can
Minus button
move max. 35 mm in the same direction together.

Indication of position in MID


During manual positioning, the electronic control
system indicates the present position of the pile
support frame in the press display MID. The
displayed value represents the absolute position in
11 2 0
relation to the centre of the feeder.

 Present position

Indication of position of pile support frame  Position code

22
Pile centering 11M9 Pile centering

Place of installation

11M9

Operator side

Technical data
Motor data
– U = DC 24 V
– P = 5 W

Potentiometer data
– U = DC 10 V
– R = 10 K

23
Pile centering 11M9 Pile centering

Interconnection diagram

X5
X10 SSR

SSR X10

X11 X12

X3 X4

X13 X14

SSR X14

Backplane of servo-
11 drive plug-in unit SSR
11LVT1
2SSM1: X2
X3 X4
X1
2SSM1: X4
X2

X5
2SSM1

Servo-drive distributor
module 2SSM1

11M9: X1 3 4
5

2 1

11M9

Servo-drive 11M9

    


+ Pin 1 X5: C1 X2: 1 X10: B14
– Pin 2 X5: C2 X2: 2 X10: D14
10V Pin 3 X5: C3 X4: 3 X14: 3
Pin 4 X5: C4 X4: 4 X14: 4
0V Pin 5 X5: C5 X4: 5 X14: 5

24
Pile centering 11M9 Pile centering

Removal and installation

 
ON
 
OFF

06 2048 ± 2

– Set the toggle switch ”Auxiliary pile ON/OFF” – Remove the servo-drive ”Pile centering”
to ”OFF”. 11M9.
– Select the service display ”SSK1”.
– Bring the pile support plate into its central
position (set to 2048±2 inc).

– Set the distance between the side frame and


the pile support frame to 83 mm.

25
Pile centering 11M9 Pile centering


4)

07 2048 ± 2

1M9: X1

– Fit the motor baseplate and gear wheel.


– Connect plug 11M9: X1.
– Set to 2048±2 inc.

– Install the servo-drive.

26
Pile centering 11M9 Pile centering

Checking the operating range


 Servo-drive ”Pile centering” 11M9

Condition:
The pile support plate is in its central position
(2048 inc).
Input Incremental value
– 35 mm 3686 " 23 inc
+ 35 mm 409 " 23 inc

Service display ”Values, incremental values servo-


drives”

27
Pile centering 11B55 Inactivating pile centering

11B55 Inactivating pile centering

If the pile support plate reaches the sensor 11B55


during
11B55
– ”Production run” or
– ”Paper run”,
the electronic control system switches the pile
centering function off. The remaining sheets on the
pile are still printed. For the pile change, the operator
lowers the pile support plate and places paper on it.
If the sensors
– ”Automatic pile transport 11B35” and
– ”Inactivating pile centering 11B55”
detect the paper, the preselected pile centering
function is active again.

Sensor 11B55

28
Pile centering 11B55 Inactivating pile centering

Place of installation

11B55

Adjustment

brown
black
blue
FAM64
XE: 55
+1
–1

11LVT1

Check

0010

29
Pile centering 11B55 Inactivating pile centering

30
Pile merging 11M8 Adjustment of pile support plate

Pile merging

11M8 Adjustment of pile support plate


The servo-drive 11M8 is only installed at the
NON–STOP feeder of Preset presses.

The servo-drive 11M8 positions the pile support


plate at the feeder.

The positioning of the pile support plate depends on


the position of the toggle switch ”Auxiliary pile
on/off”.

Toggle switch in position ”Off”

ÁÁ – Main pile control activated.


Toggle switch
ÁÁ ON
The pushbuttons ”Auxiliary pile centering” control

ÁÁ
”Auxiliary pile on / off”
OFF the servoĆdrive 11M8.

Maximum positioning range:


Pushbuttons ± 30 mm in relation to the centre of the feeder.
”Auxiliary pile centering”
Plus button Plus button = movement towards D.S.
Minus button = movement towards O.S.
Minus button
The pile support frame and pile support plate can
move max. 35 mm in the same direction together.

Pushbutton When the pile support plate reaches the position


”Main pile down” switch 11S39 ”Pile support plate limitation” while
moving down, the electronic control system
positions
– the pile support plate (through 11M8)
– the pile support frame (through 11M9)
relative to the centre of the feeder.

During positioning, the function ” Main pile down” is


blocked. Approx. 30 seconds after the beginning of
positioning, the electronic control system releases
the function ”Main pile down” again.

31
Pile merging 11M8 Adjustment of pile support plate

Toggle switch in position ”ON”

ÁÁ
Toggle switch – Auxiliary pile control activated.
ON

ÁÁ
”Auxiliary pile on / off”
The pushbuttons ”Auxiliary pile centering” control
OFF the servoĆdrive 11M8.
Maximum positioning range:
Pushbuttons ± 30 mm in relation to the centre of the feeder.
”Main pile centering”
Plus button Plus button = movement towards D.S.
Minus button = movement towards O.S.
Minus button
The pile support frame and pile support plate can
move max. 35 mm in the same direction together.

During the downward movement, the servo-drive


11M8 positions
Pushbutton
– the pile support plate
”Main pile down”
relative to the centre of the feeder.

As soon as the pile support plate lies on the ground


(position switch 11S34 actuated), this function is
stopped. The pile support plate cannot be posi-
tioned anymore.

NON-STOP mode:
When pile centering is active, the electronic control
system regulates the pile support frame. To ensure
that the pile support plate keeps its position on the
floor, it is displaced by the same value as the pile
support frame, however in the opposite direction.

32
Pile merging 11M8 Adjustment of pile support plate

Place of installation

11M8

Operator side

Technical data
Motor data
– U = DC 24 V
– P = 5 W

Potentiometer data
– U = DC 10 V
– R = 10 K

33
Pile merging 11M8 Adjustment of pile support plate

Interconnection diagram

X5
X10 SSR

SSR X10

X11 X12

X3 X4

X13 X14

SSR X13

Backplane of servo-
11 drive plug-in unit SSR
11LVT1

2SSM1: X1
X3 X4

X2 2SSM1: X3

X1 X5
2SSM1

Servo-drive distributor
module 2SSM1

11M8: X1 3 4
5

2 1

11M8

Servo-drive 11M8

    


+ Pin 1 X5: B1 X1: 3 X10: B12
– Pin 2 X5: B2 X1: 4 X10: D12
10V Pin 3 X5: B3 X3: 8 X13: 8
Pin 4 X5: B4 X3: 7 X13: 7
0V Pin 5 X5: B5 X3: 6 X13: 6

34
Pile merging 11M8 Adjustment of pile support plate

Removal and installation

 
ON
 
OFF

07 2048 ± 2

– Set the toggle switch ”Auxiliary pile ON/OFF” – Remove the servo-drive ”Adjustment of pile
to ”OFF”. support plate” 11M8.
– Select the service display ”SSK1”.
– Bring the pile support frame into its central
position (set to 2048±2 inc).

Frame
.

Guide
– Set the distance between the pile support
plate guide and the pile support frame to
31.5 mm.

35
Pile merging 11M8 Adjustment of pile support plate


4)

06 2048 ± 2

1M8: X1

– Mount the servo-drive on the motor baseplate.


– Fit the gear wheel.
– Connect plug 11M8: X1.
– Set to 2048 inc.

– Tighten the chain.

36
Pile merging 11M8 Adjustment of pile support plate

Checking the operating range


 Servo-drive ”Adjustment of pile support plate”
11M8

Condition:
The pile support frame is positioned in the centre
of the feeder.
Off-centre position: 00

Input Incremental value


– 30 mm 3461 " 23 inc

Service display ”Values, incremental values + 30 mm 634 " 23 inc


servo-drives”

37
Pile merging 11M8 Adjustment of pile support plate

38
Suction head height control 11M5 Suction head height adjustment

Suction head height control

11M5 Suction head height adjustment


The servo-drive 11M5 positions the suction head
vertically. The servo-drive can be controlled with the
pushbuttons ”Suction head height”.

Pushbuttons ”Suction head Actuation of one of the pushbuttons:


height”
– suction head positions vertically,
Plus button
– positioning range +/– 20 mm,
Minus button
– indication of position in feeder MID.
Plus button = suction head moves up (+ 20 mm).
Minus button = suction head moves down (– 20 mm).

39
Suction head height control 11M5 Suction head height adjustment

Place of installation

11M5

Preset feeder

Technical data
Motor data
– U = DC 24 V
– P = 5 W

Potentiometer data
– U = DC 10 V
– R = 10 K

40
Suction head height control 11M5 Suction head height adjustment

Interconnection diagram

X5
X10 SSR

SSR X10

X11 X12

SSR X12 X3 X4

X13 X14

Backplane of servo-
11 drive plug-in unit SSR
11LVT1

1SSM1: X1
X3 X4

1SSM1: X4
X2

X1 X5
1SSM1

Servo-drive distributor
module 1SSM1

11M5: X1 3 4
5

2 1

11M5

Servo-drive 11M5

   


+ Pin 1 X5: C1 X2: 1 X10: B6
– Pin 2 X5: C2 X2: 2 X10: D6
10V Pin 3 X5: C3 X4: 3 X12: 3
Pin 4 X5: C4 X4: 4 X12: 4
0V Pin 5 X5: C5 X4: 5 X12: 5

41
Suction head height control 11M5 Suction head height adjustment

Removal and installation

1 2

20 mm

– Remove the servo-drive ”Suction head height – Set the distance (20 mm) at the suction head
adjustment” 11M5. guide rail.

4)

03 2456 ± 2

11M5: X1

– Connect plug 11M5: X1.


– Set to 2456 ±2 inc.

42
Suction head height control 11M5 Suction head height adjustment

– Install the servo-drive.

Checking the operating range


 Servo-drive ”Suction head height adjustment”
11M5

Input Incremental value


– 20 880 " 4 inc
+ 20 3215 " 4 inc

Service display ”Values, incremental values servo-


drives”

43
Suction head height control 11M5 Suction head height adjustment

44
Size adjustment Block diagram

Size adjustment

Block diagram

Adjustment of Sheet slowdown/


format wheels format adjustment
11M4 SSM SSM 12M5
M M

Suction head/ Adjustment of


format adjustment pull lay D.S. 1M7
11M6 SSM SSM
M M

Pile stop D.S. Adjustment of


11M11 pull lay O.S. 1M8
SSM SSM
M M

Pile stop O.S. Cover guide height


11M12 adjustment 1M4
SSM SSM

M M

Sheet jogger D.S. Adjustment of printing


12M6 pressure 1...nM5
SSM SSM
M M

Sheet jogger O.S.


12M7
SSM
M

SSK1/2/3

Displays

SAK ESK
SVM MID11 MID12

REK1 REK386 DSK DNK ZID

Legend: Data line Control lines

Block diagram size adjustment

45
Size adjustment Block diagram

Command: ”PRESETTING”

 To avoid damage to the press, make sure nothing is


in the way of the following servo-drives when the
command ”Presetting” is active:
– suction head,
– pile stops D.S. and O.S.,
– format wheels,
– pull lays D.S. and O.S.,
– sheet slowdown,
– sheet joggers D.S. and O.S.

Selecting the command

As a result of the inputs in this command mode,


various servo-drives on the press are positioned
automatically.

1020 After command enabling the electronic control system


positions the following servo-drives:
On the feeder

720 – Suction head/format adjustment


1.00
– Pile stops D.S. and O.S.
– Adjustment of format wheels
Command in control console display ZID On printing unit / coating unit
– Adjustment of pull lays D.S. and O.S.
– Cover guide height adjustment
– Adjustment of printing pressure
On the delivery
– Sheet slowdown/format adjustment
– Sheet joggers D.S. and O.S.

46
Size adjustment 11M4 Adjustment of format wheels

11M4 Adjustment of format wheels


The servo-drive 11M4 positions the format wheels on
the feeder.

Automatic positioning
Automatic positioning:
– is effected through the command ”Presetting”;
– depends on inputs into CPTRONIC, such as:
paper length,
paper thickness,
front lay adjustment (smallest value);
– depends on inputs into CPC1-04, such as:
coating unit register.

Positioning accuracy: ± 0.25 mm.

End of automatic positioning:


– when the new desired position has been
reached,
– when one of the pushbuttons
”Format wheels” is actuated.
Pushbuttons ”Format wheels”
Manual positioning
Actuation of one of the pushbuttons ”Format wheels”:
Plus button
– the format wheels are repositioned irrespective
Minus button of the preset format,
– indication of the position in the feeder MID,
– when the command ”Presetting” is active,
automatic positioning is stopped immediately.
Plus button = movement towards maximum format.
Minus button = movement towards minimum format.

Fault message in the ZID


Adjustment of format wheels The symbol appears in the display ”Feeder/Warning”.

The symbol appears:


– during positioning while the press is on ”Run”.
The symbol goes off:
– when positioning is over and the press is on
”Run”,
– when one of the pushbuttons ”Format wheels”
is actuated and the press is on ”Run”.

47
Size adjustment 11M4 Adjustment of format wheels

Place of installation

11M4

Operator side

Technical data
Motor data
– U = DC 24 V
– P = 5 W

Potentiometer data
– U = DC 10 V
– R = 10 K

48
Size adjustment 11M4 Adjustment of format wheels

Interconnection diagram

X5
X10 SSR

SSR X10

X11 X12

SSR X11 X3 X4

X13 X14

Backplane of servo-
11 drive plug-in unit SSR
11LVT1

1SSM1: X1
X3 X4

X2 1SSM1: X3

X1 X5
1SSM1

Servo-drive distributor
module 1SSM1

11M4: X1 3 4
5

2 1

11M4

Servo-drive 11M4

   


+ Pin 1 X5: B1 X1: 3 X10: B4
– Pin 2 X5: B2 X1: 4 X10: D4
10V Pin 3 X5: B3 X3: 8 X11: 8
Pin 4 X5: B4 X3: 7 X11: 7
0V Pin 5 X5: B5 X3: 6 X11: 6

49
Size adjustment 11M4 Adjustment of format wheels

Removal and installation

1 2

9.00
9.00

1020

720
1.00

– Enter the paper thickness (1.0 mm).


– Enter the paper width (1020 mm).
– Enter the paper length (720 mm).
– Set the print-free margin to 9 mm. – Enable the command ”Paper size adjustment”.

3 4

ÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁ

– Remove the servo-drive ”Adjustment of – Bring the format wheels into their central
format wheels” 11M4. position.

50
Size adjustment 11M4 Adjustment of format wheels

Format wheels

.
Sheet of paper

– Set the distance ( 722.5 mm ) between the front lays and format wheels.

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
02
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
3871 ± 2
11M4: X1

– Attach the gear wheel to the motor shaft.


– Connect plug 11M4: X1.
– Set to 3871 " 2 inc.

51
Size adjustment 11M4 Adjustment of format wheels

– Install the servo-drive.

Checking the operating range


 Servo-drive ”Adjustment of format wheels”
11M4

SM102:
Print-free margin: 10.00 mm 8.00 mm
Paper length: 720 mm 280 mm
Paper thickness: 1.50 mm 1.50 mm
Incremental value: 3876 ± 2 inc 288 ± 2 inc

CD102:
Service display ”Values, incremental values Print-free margin: 10.00 mm 8.00 mm
servo-drives”
Paper length: 720 mm 280 mm
Paper thickness: 2.00 mm 2.00 mm
Incremental value: 3886 ± 2 inc 288 ± 2 inc

52
Size adjustment 11M6 Suction head/format adjustment

11M6 Suction head/format adjustment


The servo-drive 11M6 positions the suction head to
the entered paper length.

Automatic positioning
Automatic positioning:
– is effected through the command ”Presetting”;
– depends on the entered sheet length.

Positioning accuracy: ± 0.30 mm.

Automatic positioning range:


– max. 720 mm,
– min. 500 mm because of danger of collision with
the lateral pile stops,
– in the case of sheet lengths below 500 mm, the
suction head stops at the lower limit (500 mm),
– manual positioning if the sheets are shorter (less
than 500 mm).

End of automatic positioning:


– when the new desired position has been
reached,
– when the lower limit (500 mm) of the positioning
range has been reached,
– when one of the pushbuttons
”Suction head format” is actuated.
Manual positioning
Pushbuttons Actuation of one of the pushbuttons ”Suction head
”Suction head format” format”:
– the servo-drive ”Suction head/
Plus button format adjustment” 11M6 is controlled,
Minus button – the suction head positions irrespective of the
preset format,
– indication of the position in the feeder MID,
– automatic positioning is stopped immediately.

Plus button = to max. 730 mm.


Minus button = to min. 280 mm.

53
Size adjustment 11M6 Suction head/format adjustment

Fault message in the ZID

Suction head/format The symbol appears in the display ”Feeder/Warning”.


adjustment
The symbol appears:
– during positioning while the press is on ”Run”,
– when the lower limit is reached during
automatic positioning.

The symbol goes off:


– when positioning is over and the press is on
”Run”,
– when one of the pushbuttons ”Suction head
format” is actuated and the press is on ”Run”.

54
Size adjustment 11M6 Suction head/format adjustment

Place of installation

11M6

Preset feeder

Technical data
Motor data
– U = DC 24 V
– P = 5 W

Potentiometer data
– U = DC 10 V
– R = 10 K

55
Size adjustment 11M6 Suction head/format adjustment

Interconnection diagram

X5
X10 SSR

SSR X10

X11 X12

SSR X12 X3 X4

X13 X14

Backplane of servo-
11 drive plug-in unit SSR
11LVT1

1SSM1: X2
X3 X4

X2
1SSM1: X4

X1 X5
1SSM1

Servo-drive distributor
module 1SSM1

11M6: X1 3 4
5

2 1

11M6

Servo-drive 11M6

   


+ Pin 1 X5: D1 X2: 3 X10: B8
– Pin 2 X5: D2 X2: 4 X10: D8
10V Pin 3 X5: D3 X4: 8 X12: 8
Pin 4 X5: D4 X4: 7 X12: 7
0V Pin 5 X5: D5 X4: 6 X12: 6

56
Size adjustment 11M6 Suction head/format adjustment

Removal and installation

Á Front
sheet stop

Governor
foot

Marking
3

2
1
– Remove the servo-drive ”Suction head/format Note:
adjustment” 11M6. To compensate for the backlash, the 720 mm
– Set the distance between the front sheet stop must be set from the max. possible distance.
and the marking on the governor foot to
720 mm.

4)

11M6: X1
04 462 ± 2

11M6: X1

– Connect plug 11M6: X1.


– Set to 462 ±2 inc.

57
Size adjustment 11M6 Suction head/format adjustment

– Install the servo-drive.

Checking the operating range


 Servo-drive ”Suction head/format adjustment”
11M6

Paper length Incremental value


280 mm 3634 " 2 inc
730 mm 389 " 2 inc

Service display ”Values, incremental values


servo-drives”

58
Size adjustment 11M11/11M12 Pile stops D.S./O.S.

11M11/11M12 Pile stops D.S./O.S.


The servo-drive 11M11 positions the pile stop on the
D.S.
The servo-drive 11M12 positions the pile stop on the
O.S.

Automatic positioning
Automatic positioning:
– is effected through the command ”Presetting”,
– depends on the inputs into CPTRONIC, such as:
sheet width,
off-centre position,
preselected pull direction.
Positioning accuracy: ± 0.3 mm.

End of automatic positioning:


– when the new desired position has been
reached,
– when one of the pushbuttons ”Pile stops larger
format” or ”Pile stops smaller format” is
actuated.

Manual positioning
Pushbutton Actuation of pushbutton ”Pile stops larger format”:
”Pile stops larger format”
– Control of servo-drives ”Pile stop D.S.” 11M11
and ”Pile stop O.S.” 11M12,
– irrespective of the preset format, the pile stops
position to a larger format.
Actuation of pushbutton ”Pile stops smaller format”:
Pushbutton – Control of servo-drives ”Pile stop D.S.” 11M11
”Pile stops smaller format” and ”Pile stop O.S.” 11M12,
– irrespective of the preset format, the pile stops
position to a smaller format.

Actuation of one of the pushbuttons:


– indication of the position in the feeder MID,
– the off-centre position can be up to ± 50 mm,
– automatic positioning is stopped immediately.
Plus button = to max. 1040 mm.
Minus button = to min. 420 mm.

59
Size adjustment 11M11/11M12 Pile stops D.S./O.S.

Fault message in the ZID


The symbols appear in the display ”Feeder/Warning”.
Pile stop D.S.
The symbols appear:
Pile stop O.S. – during positioning while the press is on ”Run”.

The symbols go off:


– when positioning is over and the press is on
”Run”,
– when one of the pushbuttons ”Pile stop D.S.” or
”Pile stop O.S.” is actuated and the press is on
”Run”.

Prepiling

This function can only be activated in the preselec-


tion display. To inactivate it, press the correspond-
ing button once more.
Selecting the display
The lateral pile stops move together when
– the pile support plate moving down is stopped
by means of the button ”Pile stop”
and
– the pile support plate is in front of the position
switch ”Pile support plate limitation” 11S39.

The distance between the stops is:


sheet width entered + 5 mm O.S.,
+ 5 mm D.S.
The ”5 mm O.S. + 5 mm D.S.” are added to the
entered value by the electronic control system.

 
  
  

The lateral pile stops move apart when
– the pile is raised.

The distance between the stops is:


sheet width entered + 25 mm O.S.,
+ 25 mm D.S.
The ”25 mm O.S. + 25 mm D.S.” are added to the
entered value by the electronic control system.

 Symbol ”Prepiling”

60
Size adjustment 11M11/11M12 Pile stops D.S./O.S.

Place of installation

11M12

11M11

Operator side

Technical data
Motor data
– U = DC 24 V
– P = 5 W

Potentiometer data
– U = DC 10 V
– R = 10 K

61
Size adjustment 11M11/11M12 Pile stops D.S./O.S.

Interconnection diagram 11M11

X5
X10 SSR

SSR X10

X15 X16

SSR X15 X3 X4

X17 X18

Backplane of servo-drive
11 plug-in unit SSR
3SSM2: X1 11LVT1

3SSM1: X2

X2

X1 X3
3SSM2

Servo-drive distributor
module 3SSM2

3 4
11M11: X1 5

2 1

11M11

Servo-drive 11M11

    


+ Pin 1 X5: A1 X1: 1 X10: B18
– Pin 2 X5: A2 X1: 2 X10: D18
10V Pin 3 X5: A3 X3: 3 X15: 3
Pin 4 X5: A4 X3: 4 X15: 4
0V Pin 5 X5: A5 X3: 5 X15: 5

62
Size adjustment 11M11/11M12 Pile stops D.S./O.S.

Interconnection diagram 11M12

X5
X10 SSR

SSR X10

X15 X16

SSR X15 X3 X4

X17 X18

Backplane of servo-
11 drive plug-in unit SSR
3SSM2: X1 11LVT1

3SSM2: X2

X2

X1 X3

3SSM2
Servo-drive distributor
module 3SSM2

11M12: X1
3 4
5

2 1

11M12

Servo-drive 11M12

    


+ Pin 1 X5: B1 X1: 3 X10: B20
– Pin 2 X5: B2 X1: 4 X10: D20
10V Pin 3 X5: B3 X2: 8 X15: 8
Pin 4 X5: B4 X2: 7 X15: 7
0V Pin 5 X5: B5 X2: 6 X15: 6

63
Size adjustment 11M11/11M12 Pile stops D.S./O.S.

Removal and installation

11M11

ÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁ
11M12

ÁÁÁ ÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁ
– Remove the servo-drive ”Pile stop D.S.”
11M11 or ”Pile stop O.S.” 11M12.

 D.S.

O.S.

O.S.

Á
ÁÁ
D.S.

D.S./O.S. = 180 mm
– Set the distance between the side frame D.S. (or
side frame O.S.) and the pile stop D.S. (or pile
stop O.S.) to 180 mm.

64
Size adjustment 11M11/11M12 Pile stops D.S./O.S.

09 3015 ± 2 10 1072 ± 2

11M11: X1
11M12: X1

– Fit the motor baseplate and gear wheel.


– Connect plug 11M11: X1 (or 11M12: X1).
– 11M11 (D.S.) = set to 3015±2 inc.
11M12 (O.S.) = set to 1072±2 inc.

 

1020

720
1,00

– Install the servo-drive. – Select the command ”Presetting”.


– Press the button ”Input”.
– The servo-drives position to the displayed
format.

65
Size adjustment 11M11/11M12 Pile stops D.S./O.S.

Checking the operating range


 Servo-drive ”Pile stop D.S.” 11M11
 Servo-drive ”Pile stop O.S.” 11M12

Position the pile stops manually to the maximum


format (press the button ”Pile stops larger format”).
Incremental value for 11M11: 3231 ± 2 inc
Incremental value for 11M12: 856 ± 2 inc

Position the pile stops manually to the minimum


format (press the button ”Pile stops smaller format”).
Incremental value for 11M11: 783 ± 2 inc
Service display ”Values, incremental values
servo-drives” Incremental value for 11M12: 3304 ± 2 inc

66
Size adjustment 1M4 Cover guide height adjustment

1M4 Cover guide height adjustment


For cover guide height adjustment a servo-drive is
installed on the operator side of the 1st printing unit.
With this servo-drive the cover guides (gripper
opening) on the transfer gripper are adjusted. By
means of a mechanical device (eccentric bush)
gripper opening can be adjusted within a range from
0.1 mm to 1.9 mm.

Positioning
The new desired position is always approached
from the direction of the widest gripper opening
(1.9 mm).

Example 1:
Actual position Reversal point
The new desired position is larger than the actual
position.

When the new desired position has been entered,


0 New desired position 1.9mm the servo-drive first positions to the reversal point
 and then to the new desired position .
Example 1

Example 2:
New desired
position Actual position The new desired position is smaller than the actual
position.

When the new desired position has been entered,


0 1.9mm the servo-drive moves to the new desired position.

Example 2

Automatic positioning
Entering the paper thickness When the command ”Presetting” has been
enabled, the electronic control system positions the
cover guides on

CD102 and SM102 (only with REK386):


– to twice the paper thickness entered plus
0.1 mm (max. 1.9 mm),

SM74 and SM52:


– to twice the paper thickness entered (max.
1.9 mm).

67
Size adjustment 1M4 Cover guide height adjustment

Manual positioning
After actuating the button ”Cover guide height
adjustment”, the operator can make adjustments
Selecting the display with the left-hand +/– buttons.

 Indication of the present value of the cover


guide height adjustment

Actual value/coarse display, cover guide height


adjustment

68
Size adjustment 1M4 Cover guide height adjustment

Place of installation

ÁÁÁÁ ÉÉÉ
ÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉ
ÉÉ
ÉÉ
ÉÉ

Printing unit 1 and feeder

Technical data
Motor data
– U = DC 24 V
– P = 5 W

Potentiometer data
– U = DC 10 V
– R = 10 K

69
Size adjustment 1M4 Cover guide height adjustment

Interconnection diagram

X10 X5
SSR

SSR X20

X21 X22

X3 X4

X23 X24

SSR X23

Backplane of servo-drive
1 plug-in unit SSR

2SSM1: X2 1LVT1

X3 X4

X1 2SSM1: X4
X2

X5

2SSM1

Servo-drive distributor
module 2SSM1

1M4: X1

1M4
Servo-drive 1M4

    


+ 1 X5: D1 X2: 3 X20: B12
– 2 X5: D2 X2: 4 X20: D12
10V 4 X5: D3 X4: 8 X23: 8
5 X5: D4 X4: 7 X23: 7
0V 6 X5: D5 X4: 6 X23: 6

70
Size adjustment 1M4 Cover guide height adjustment

Removal and installation of motor

1
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉ
É
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉ
É

ÉÉÉ
0 1 ÉÉÉ
 ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉ 1M4
15Q66
ÉÉ
ÉÉ
2

ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
1M4

ÉÉÉ
 ½


ÉÉÉ
ÉÉ
É
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉ
É
ÉÉÉ 
ÉÉÉ
1M4

 ÉÉÉ

71
Size adjustment 1M4 Cover guide height adjustment

4
ÉÉ
ÉÉ
É
ÉÉ
ÉÉ
É
ÉÉ 1
ÉÉÉ
1M4
red

ÉÉ
brown
1
blue 2 2
black

ÉÉÉÉ 3
ÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
1M4 0 1

ÉÉÉ
1 15Q66

72
Size adjustment 1M4 Cover guide height adjustment

Removal and installation of potentiometer

1
2 310 . 0
3

1 0 1

15Q66

ÉÉÉ
É
ÉÉÉ
É
3 ÉÉÉ 1M4

ÉÉÉ
2
1

3
ÉÉÉÉ
ÇÇ
ÉÉÉÉ
ÇÇ
ÉÉÉÉ
ÇÇ
ÉÉÉ
2 ÉÉÉÉ
ÇÇ
ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉÉ
ÇÇ
1
ÉÉ ÉÉÉÉ

73
Size adjustment 1M4 Cover guide height adjustment

defec- new
tive

1 M4: X1 
 0 1
blue
beige 

yellow  black
black 
red
15Q66

08 1016 ± 4

74
Size adjustment 1M4 Cover guide height adjustment

ÉÉÉ
É
ÉÉÉ
É
ÉÉÉ
É

ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ

ÉÉÉ
É
ÉÉÉ
É
ÉÉÉ
É
ÉÉÉ
1M4

ÉÉÉ


75
Size adjustment 1M4 Cover guide height adjustment

Checking the operating range


Preset version:
 Servo-drive ”Cover guide height adjustment”
1M4

Paper thickness Incremental value


0.01 mm 676 " 4 inc
1.00 mm 3260 " 4 inc

Service display ”Values, incremental values


servo-drives”

Standard version:
 Servo-drive ”Cover guide height adjustment”
1M4

Paper thickness Incremental value


0.01 mm 676 " 4 inc
1.00 mm 3260 " 4 inc

Service display ”Values, incremental values


servo-drives”

76
Size adjustment 1M2/1M3 Print-free margin D.S./O.S.

1M2/1M3 Print-free margin D.S./O.S.


The print-free margin on the sheet is adjusted by
Running direction of paper means of two servo-drives. These servo-drives
change the position of the front lay stop. The front
lays are fitted on a shaft which, for adjustment of
the print-free margin, can be adjusted parallel or at
Front lays an angle (to the feed table).
For this purpose, one servo-drive is installed on the
2mm drive side and one on the operator side. With these
two servo-drives the front lays can be influenced in
       
      such a way that the print-free margin measures

 between 10 mm and 12 mm. The adjustment is
made at the central control console.

Graphical representation in the ZID

Selecting the display

Graphical representation ”Print-free margin”

Minimum value
Maximum value

Current value D.S.


Current value O.S.

To adjust the print-free margin, press the


Actual value/fine display ”Print-free margin” corresponding function button. Then make the
adjustment within a range from 10.0 mm to
Print-free margin O.S.
12.0 mm by means of the left-hand +/– buttons.

Print-free margin D.S.


and O.S.

Print-free margin D.S.

77
Size adjustment 1M2/1M3 Print-free margin D.S./O.S.

Place of installation

ÁÁÁÁ

1M2 = D.S.
1M3 = O.S.

Printing unit 1 and feeder

Technical data
Motor data
– U = DC 24 V
– P = 5 W

Potentiometer data
– U = DC 10 V
– R = 10 K

78
Size adjustment 1M2/1M3 Print-free margin D.S./O.S.

Interconnection diagram

X5
X10 SSR

SSR X10

X15 X16

X3 X4

X17 X18

SSR X18

Backplane of servo-
1 drive plug-in unit SSR

1SSM1: X1 1LVT1

X3 X4

1SSM1 X3
X2
X1
X5
1SSM
1
Servo-drive distributor
module SSM 1

X3 SSM3 X3 SSM3
X1 X2 X1 X2

1M2 1M3 Servo-drives 1M2 and


1M3

 
SSM3 SSM 1 SSR SSM3 SSM1 SSR
+ X3: 1 X5: A1 X1: 1 X10: B30 X3: 1 X5: B1 X1: 3 X10: B32
– X3: 2 X5: A2 X1: 2 X10: D30 X3: 2 X5: B2 X1: 4 X10: D32
10V X3: 3 X5: A3 X3: 3 X18: 3 X3: 3 X5: B3 X3: 8 X18: 8
X3: 4 X5: A4 X3: 4 X18: 4 X3: 4 X5: B4 X3: 7 X18: 7
0V X3: 5 X5: A5 X3: 5 X18: 5 X3: 5 X5: B5 X3:6 X18: 6

79
Size adjustment 1M2/1M3 Print-free margin D.S./O.S.

Removal and installation of motor

1
1
0 1

15Q66
1M2
(1M3) 2 3 2–4

1M2
(1M3)
2 2–4

80
Size adjustment 1M2/1M3 Print-free margin D.S./O.S.

Removal and installation of potentiometer

1
1 216 . 0
2
0 1

15Q66

1M2
(1M3) 2 2–4

2
1

81
Size adjustment 1M2/1M3 Print-free margin D.S./O.S.

4
Pull rail



Front lay

defec- new
tive

0 1

15Q66

82
Size adjustment 1M2/1M3 Print-free margin D.S./O.S.

1M2 1M3
05 2048 ± 6 06 2048 ± 6

1M2
(1M3)
22–4
3

83
Size adjustment 1M2/1M3 Print-free margin D.S./O.S.

Checking the operating range


Preset version:
 Servo-drive ”Print-free margin D.S.” 1M2
 Servo-drive ”Print-free margin O.S.” 1M3

Input Incremental value


8 mm 3850 " 4 inc
10 mm 246 " 4 inc

Service display ”Values, incremental values


servo-drives”

Standard version:
 Servo-drive ”Print-free margin D.S.” 1M2
 Servo-drive ”Print-free margin O.S.” 1M3

Input Incremental value


8 mm 3850 " 4 inc
10 mm 246 " 4 inc

Service display ”Values, incremental values


servo-drives”

84
Size adjustment 1...nM5 Adjustment of printing pressure

1...nM5 Adjustment of printing pressure


The servo-drive ”Adjustment of printing pressure”
changes the gap between blanket cylinder and
impression cylinder. The rotation of the drive is
transmitted to the blanket cylinder via a worm gear
and a gear segment. The operator thus influences
the pressure exerted on the print sheet during the
printing process.

Automatic positioning
When the paper thickness is entered under the
command ”Presetting”, the servo-drive automati-
cally positions to the value:
paper thickness – 0.1 mm = pressure.

Examples:
0.07 –0.1 = –0.03 ! –0.03 x –1 = 0.03
0.50 –0.1 = 0.40 ! 0.40 x –1 = –0.40
The correction factor (–1) ensures that the result is
shown correctly in the ”Actual value display”.

 Paper thickness entered


 Symbol for the paper thickness entered
 Upper adjustment limit for the printing
pressure (max. gap between blanket cylinder
and impression cylinder).
SM102 = – 0.75 mm,
CD102, CU on SM102 = – 1.20 mm.
 Graphical representation of the printing
pressure
 Present value of the printing pressure
Explanation of the display  ”0” position of the printing pressure
 Lower adjustment limit (0.3 mm) for the
printing pressure (min. gap between blanket
cylinder and impression cylinder)

85
Size adjustment 1...nM5 Adjustment of printing pressure

Manual positioning

Selecting the display

 Graphical representation of the adjustment of


the printing pressure
The servo-drive can be positioned manually with the
right-hand +/– buttons. If no printing unit has been
selected in the ”Printing unit/actual value display”, all
drives respond. If only one drive is to be positioned,
the corresponding printing unit must be selected
before.

Note:
The software limits the maximum pressure to 0.55.
The max. pressure is composed of
Actual value/coarse display, adjustment of printing
pressure – the automatic positioning value (0.10) and
– the manual positioning value (max. 0.45).

86
Size adjustment 1...nM5 Adjustment of printing pressure

Place of installation

1...nM5

L-M5 1...8M5

Operator side

Technical data
Motor data
– U = DC 24 V
– P = 5 W

Potentiometer data
– U = DC 10 V
– R = 10 K

87
Size adjustment 1...nM5 Adjustment of printing pressure

Interconnection diagram for printing unit 1...nM5

PU1, PU3, PU5


X5
PU2, PU4 SSR X20 X20 X30 SSR

PU6, PU7, PU8 SSR X30

PU1 = SSR X24


X25 X26
PU2 = SSR X25
PU3 = SSR X26 X3 X4
PU4 = SSR X27
X27 X28
PU5 = SSR X28
PU6 = SSR X31
PU7 = SSR X32
PU8 = SSR X33

Backplane of servo-drive plug-in unit SSR


1...8

1SSM2: X1 1...8LVT1
1...8M5: X1

1SSM2 X2
X1 1...8M5: X1
X2
X3
Servo-drive 1...8M5
1SSM2
Servo-drive distributor
module 1SSM2

1...8M5:X1 1SSM 2 SSR


PU1 PU2 PU3 PU4
+ 1 X3: A1 X1: 1 X20: B14 X20: B18 X20: B22 X20: B26
– 2 X3: A2 X1: 2 X20: B14 X20: D18 X20: D22 X20: D26
10V 4 X3: A3 X2: 3 X24: 3 X25: 3 X26: 3 X27: 3
5 X3: A4 X2: 4 X24: 4 X25: 4 X26: 4 X27: 4
0V 6 X3: A5 X2: 5 X24: 5 X25: 5 X26: 5 X27: 5
1...8M5:X1 1SSM 2 SSR
PU5 PU6 PU7 PU8
+ 1 X3: A1 X1: 1 X20: B30 X30: B2 X30: B6 X30: B10
– 2 X3: A2 X1: 2 X20: D30 X30: D2 X30: D6 X30: D10
10V 4 X3: A3 X2: 3 X28: 3 X31: 3 X32: 3 X32: 3
5 X3: A4 X2: 4 X28: 4 X31: 4 X32: 4 X32: 4
0V 6 X3: A5 X2: 5 X28: 5 X31: 5 X32: 5 X32: 5

88
Size adjustment 1...nM5 Adjustment of printing pressure

Interconnection diagram for coating unit 2...nM5

PU3, PU5
X5
PU2, PU4 SSR X20 X20 X30 SSR

PU6, PU7, PU8 SSR X30

PU2 = SSR X25


X25 X26
PU3 = SSR X26
PU4 = SSR X27 X3 X4
PU5 = SSR X28
X27 X28
PU6 = SSR X31
PU7 = SSR X32
PU8 = SSR X33
PU9 = SSR X34

Backplane of servo-drive plug-in unit SSR


2..9

1SSM2: X1 2...9LVT1
2...9M5: X1

1SSM2 X2
X1 2...9M5: X1
X2
X3
Servo-drive 2...9M5
1SSM2
Servo-drive control
module 1SSM2

2...9M5:X1 1SSM 2 SSR


PU2 PU3 PU4 PU5
+ 1 X3: A1 X1: 1 X20: B18 X20: B22 X20: B26 X20: B30
– 2 X3: A2 X1: 2 X20: D18 X20: D22 X20: D26 X20: D30
10V 4 X3: A3 X2: 3 X25: 3 X26: 3 X27: 3 X28: 3
5 X3: A4 X2: 4 X25: 4 X26: 4 X27: 4 X28: 4
0V 6 X3: A5 X2: 5 X25: 5 X26: 5 X27: 5 X28: 5
2...9M5:X1 1SSM 2 SSR
PU6 PU7 PU8 PU9
+ 1 X3: A1 X1: 1 X30: B2 X30: B6 X30: B10 X30: B14
– 2 X3: A2 X1: 2 X30: D2 X30: D6 X30: D10 X30: D14
10V 4 X3: A3 X2: 3 X31: 3 X32: 3 X32: 3 X34: 3
5 X3: A4 X2: 4 X31: 4 X32: 4 X32: 4 X34: 4
0V 6 X3: A5 X2: 5 X31: 5 X32: 5 X32: 5 X34: 5

89
Size adjustment 1...nM5 Adjustment of printing pressure

Removal and installation of motor

1 2
1

0 1

2 1...8M5 X1

– Switch off the press. – Disconnect 1...8M5 X1.


– Open the guard on the O.S.

3 4

– Loosen the fixing bolts on the motor. – Remove the defective motor.

90
Size adjustment 1...nM5 Adjustment of printing pressure

5 6

– Install the new motor. – Tighten the fixing bolts.

7 8
1 brown brown
1
2
blue blue

2 1...8M5 X1

0 1

... 0.30
...-1.20

– Connect the motor. The value on the display changes in


– Start the press. positive direction (0.30).
The value on the display changes in
negative direction (–1.20).

91
Size adjustment 1...nM5 Adjustment of printing pressure

Removal and installation of potentiometer

1 2
1

0 1
1...8M5 X1

– Switch off the press. – Disconnect the potentiometer from 1...8M5 X1.
– Open the guard on the O.S.

3 4 4

1
2
– Loosen the stud on the gear wheel. – Turn the mechanism to the ”0” value of the
– Pull the gear wheel off the potentiometer. scale by means of the hexagon.
– Loosen the nut on the potentiometer.
– Replace the potentiometer.

92
Size adjustment 1...nM5 Adjustment of printing pressure

5 6

1...8M5 X1

1
blue 4 beige
black 5 yellow
red 6 black
2
0 1

– Connect the new potentiometer. – Select service display 2.


– Start the press.

7 8

1
PU1 ... PUn =
1234 ± 8 inc 2

– Set the potentiometer to 1234 ± 8 inc. – Fasten the potentiometer.


– Put the gear wheel back in place and fasten
it with the stud.

93
Size adjustment 1...nM5 Adjustment of printing pressure

... 0.30

– Check the operating range: 0.30 = 616 ± 8 inc

10

...-1.20

– Check the operating range: –1.20 = 3550 ± 8 inc

94
Size adjustment 1...nM5 Adjustment of printing pressure

Checking the operating range


Preset version
 Servo-drive ”Adjustment of printing pressure”
1M5

Input Incremental value


+ 0.30 616 " 8 inc
– 1.20 3550 " 8 inc

Service display ”Values, incremental values


servo-drives”

95
Size adjustment 1M7/1M8 Adjustment of pull lays

1M7/1M8 Adjustment of pull lays


The servo-drive 1M7 positions the pull lay on the D.S.
The servo-drive 1M8 positions the pull lay on the O.S.

Automatic positioning
Automatic positioning:
– is effected through the command ”Presetting”,
– depends on the inputs into CPTRONIC, such as
sheet width, off-centre position, pull direction,
precision adjustment of pull lay.

After actuation of the input button, the electronic


control system positions:
– the pull lay in use to the sheet width entered,
– the pull lay not in use 15 mm outside the
entered sheet width.

A pneumatic clamping mechanism locks the pull lay


1M7 in position. The pneumatic clamping mechanism
opens after actuation of the input button for the
command ”Presetting”.
1M8
The pneumatic clamping mechanism closes:
– when the pull lay is in the new position,
– if the new position is not reached in less than
4 minutes (fault message 7FFF in Dyn-test).

The electronic control system determines the


position of each pull lay via two potentiometers:
Potentiometer for
– during coarse positioning through the poten-
precision adjustment
tiometer in the servo-drive,
– during precision positioning through the
potentiometer near the servo-drive.
Servo-drives ”Adjustment of pull lays”

96
Size adjustment 1M7/1M8 Adjustment of pull lays

Precision adjustment of pull lay

Selecting the display

 Symbol and indication of the current value for


the precision adjustment of the pull lay
The symbol shows the active pull lay:
Arrow pointing up = pull lay on D.S. active
Arrow pointing down = pull lay on O.S. active
With the right-hand +/– buttons the active pull lay
can be precision-adjusted. Adjustment is possible
within a range of ± 5 mm in relation to the preset
format.

Actual value/coarse display, ”Adjustment of pull lays”

97
Size adjustment 1M7/1M8 Adjustment of pull lays

Place of installation

1M7

1M8

1Y47

Potentiometer for
precision adjustment

Operator side

Technical data
Motor data
– U = DC 24 V
– P = 5 W

Potentiometer data
– U = DC 10 V
– R = 10 K

98
Size adjustment 1M7/1M8 Adjustment of pull lays

Interconnection diagram 1M7

X5
X20 SSR

SSR X20

X21 X22

SSR X21 X3 X4

X23 X24

Backplane of servo-
1 drive plug-in unit SSR
11LVT1

1SSM1: X2
X3 X4

X2
1SSM1: X4

X1 X5
1SSM1
Servo-drive distributor
module 1SSM1

3 4
1M7: X1 5

2 1

1M7

Servo-drive 1M7 Potentiometer


(with potentiometer for coarse adjustment) (for precision adjustment)

+ Pin 1 – X5: C1 X2: 1 X20: B2


– Pin 2 X5: C2 X2: 2 X20: D2
10V Pin 3 X5: C3 X4: 3 X21: 3 X5: D3 X4: 8 X21: 8
Pin 4 X5: C4 X4: 4 X21: 4 X5: D4 X4: 7 X21: 7
0V Pin 5 X5: C5 X4: 5 X21: 5 X5: D5 X4: 6 X21: 6

99
Size adjustment 1M7/1M8 Adjustment of pull lays

Interconnection diagram 1M8

X5
X20 SSR

SSR X20

X21 X22

SSR X22 X3 X4

X23 X24

Backplane of servo-drive
1 plug-in unit SSR
11LVT1

2SSM1: X1
X3 X4

X2 2SSM1: X3

X1 X5
2SSM1
Servo-drive distributor
module 2SSM1

3 4
1M8: X1 5

2 1

1M8

Servo-drive 1M8 Potentiometer


(with potentiometer for coarse adjustment) (for precision adjustment)

+ Pin 1 X5: A1 X1: 1 X20: B6


– Pin 2 X5: A2 X1: 2 X20: D6
10V Pin 3 X5: A3 X3: 3 X22: 3 X5: B3 X3: 8 X22: 8
Pin 4 X5: A4 X3: 4 X22: 4 X5: B4 X3: 7 X22: 7
0V Pin 5 X5: A5 X3: 5 X22: 5 X5: B5 X3: 6 X22: 6

100
Size adjustment 1M7/1M8 Adjustment of pull lays

Removal and installation

 

1Y47

– Remove the servo-drive ”Adjustment of pull – Actuate the solenoid valve 1Y47 manually
lay D.S.” 1M7 (or ”Adjustment of pull lay O.S.” and hold it in this position (pneumatic
1M8). clamping mechanism is open).

 D.S.
1
2
2
1 3
O.S. 3

– Set the distance between the side frame D.S. Note:


(or O.S.) and the inside of the pull lay stop to Because of the backlash, the distance between
55 mm. the side frame and pull lay stop must first be
– Let go of the solenoid valve 1Y47. smaller than 55 mm.
Then the correct value of 55 mm must be set.

101
Size adjustment 1M7/1M8 Adjustment of pull lays

01 3055 ± 2 03 3055 ± 2

1M7: X1
1M8: X1

– Fit the gear wheel.


– Connect plug 1M7: X1 (or 1M8: X1).
– 1M7 (D.S.) = set to 3055±2 inc.
– 1M8 (O.S.) = set to 3055±2 inc.

 

1020

1,00 720

– Install the servo-drive. – Select the command ”Presetting”.


– Press the button ”Input”.
– The servo-drives position to the displayed
format.

102
Size adjustment 1M7/1M8 Adjustment of pull lays

Checking the operating range


 Servo-drive ”Adjustment of pull lay D.S.” 1M7
 Servo-drive ”Adjustment of pull lay O.S.” 1M8

Only compare the new servo-drive with the


indicated values.

Maximum sheet width


Precision adjustment: 0.00 mm (2048 inc)
Sheet width: 1040 mm
Off-centre position: 00
Service display ”Values, incremental values For 1M7: pulling towards D.S.
servo-drives”
Incremental value: 3155 ± 4 inc
For 1M8: pulling towards O.S.
Incremental value: 3155 ± 4 inc

Minimum sheet width


Precision adjustment: 0.00 mm (2048 inc)
Sheet width: 420 mm
Off-centre position: 00
For 1M7: pulling towards D.S.
Incremental value: 933 ± 4 inc
For 1M8: pulling towards O.S.
Incremental value: 933 ± 4 inc

103
Size adjustment 12M5 Sheet slowdown/format adjustment

12M5 Sheet slowdown/format adjustment


The servo-drive 12M5 positions the sheet
slowdown at the delivery to the entered sheet
length.

Automatic positioning
Automatic positioning:
– is effected through the command ”Preset-
ting”,
– depends on the entered sheet length.
Positioning accuracy: ± 0.50 mm.

Positioning range:
– max. 720 mm,
– min. 500 mm (because of danger of collision
with the sheet joggers),
– in the case of sheet lengths below 500 mm,
the suction head stops at the lower limit
(500 mm),
– manual positioning if the sheets are shorter
(less than 500 mm).

End of automatic positioning:


– when the new desired position has been
reached,
– when the lower limit (500 mm) of the
positioning range has been reached,
– when one of the pushbuttons ”Sheet
slowdown format” is actuated.

Manual positioning
Pushbuttons Actuation of one of the pushbuttons ”Sheet
”Sheet slowdown format” slowdown format”:
– the sheet slowdown positions irrespective of
Plus button the preset format,
– indication of the position in the delivery MID,
Minus button
– automatic positioning is stopped immediately.
Plus button = to max. 730 mm.
Minus button = to min. 270 mm.

104
Size adjustment 12M5 Sheet slowdown/format adjustment

Fault message in the ZID


Sheet slowdown/format The symbol appears in the display ”Delivery/
adjustment Warning”.

The symbol appears:


– during positioning while the press is on ”Run”,
– when the lower limit is reached during
automatic positioning.

The symbol goes off:


– when positioning is over and the press is on
”Run”,
– when one of the pushbuttons ”Sheet slowdown
format” is actuated and the press is on ”Run”.

105
Size adjustment 12M5 Sheet slowdown/format adjustment

Place of installation

12M5

Operator side

Technical data
Motor data
– U = DC 24 V
– P = 5 W

Potentiometer data
– U = DC 10 V
– R = 10 K

106
Size adjustment 12M5 Sheet slowdown/format adjustment

Interconnection diagram

X5
X10 SSR

SSR X10

X15 X16

SSR X16 X3 X4

X17 X18

Backplane of servo-drive
12
plug-in unit SSR

12LVT1

1SSM1: X1 X3 X4

1SSM1: X3
X2

X1 X5
1SSM1
Servo-drive distributor
module 1SSM1

3 4
5
12M5: X1
2 1

12M5

Servo-drive 12M5

12M5:X1 1SSM 1 SSR


+ Pin 1 X5: B1 X1: 3 X10: B24
– Pin 2 X5: B2 X1: 4 X10: D24
10V Pin 3 X5: B3 X3: 8 X16: 8
Pin 4 X5: B4 X3: 7 X16: 7
0V Pin 5 X5: B5 X3: 6 X16: 6

107
Size adjustment 12M5 Sheet slowdown/format adjustment

Removal and installation

Rear paper stop


1 2

3
1
2

Front paper stop

– Set the distance between the front and rear


paper stops to 600 mm.
Note:
To compensate for the backlash, the 600 mm must
– Remove the servo-drive ”Sheet slowdown / be set from the max. possible distance.
format adjustment” 12M5.

12M5: X1

12 1370

Coupling part

– Mount the coupling part.


– Connect plug 12M5: X1.
– Set to 1370 inc.

108
Size adjustment 12M5 Sheet slowdown/format adjustment

– Install the servo-drive.

Checking the operating range


 Servo-drive ”Sheet slowdown / format
adjustment” “ 12M5

Paper length Incremental value


280 mm 3540 " 3 inc
720 mm 556 " 3 inc
730 mm 498 " 3 inc

Service display ”Values, incremental values


servo-drives”

109
Size adjustment 12M6/12M7 Sheet joggers D.S./O.S.

12M6/12M7 Sheet joggers D.S./O.S.


The servo-drive 12M6 positions the sheet jogger on
the D.S.
The servo-drive 12M7 positions the sheet jogger on
the O.S.

Automatic positioning
Automatic positioning:
– is effected through the command ”Presetting”,
– depends on the inputs into CPTRONIC, such as:
sheet width, off-centre position.

Positioning accuracy: ± 1.0 mm.

End of automatic positioning:


– when the new desired position has been
reached,
– when one of the pushbuttons ”Sheet jogger
D.S.” or ”Sheet jogger O.S.” is actuated.

Manual positioning
Pushbuttons Actuation of one of the pushbuttons ”Sheet jogger
”Sheet jogger D.S.” D.S.”:
– the servo-drive ”Sheet jogger D.S.” 12M6 is
Plus button controlled,
– the sheet jogger on the D.S. positions irrespec-
Minus button
tive of the preset format.

Pushbuttons Actuation of one of the pushbuttons ”Sheet jogger


”Sheet jogger O.S.” O.S.”:
– the servo-drive ”Sheet jogger O.S.” 12M7 is
Plus button controlled,

Minus button – the sheet jogger on the O.S. positions irrespec-


tive of the preset format.
Actuation of one of the pushbuttons ”Sheet jogger”:
– indication of the position in the delivery MID,
– the off-centre position can be up to ± 50 mm,
– automatic positioning is stopped immediately.
Plus button = to max. 1040 mm.
Minus button = to min. 420 mm.

110
Size adjustment 12M6/12M7 Sheet joggers D.S./O.S.

Fault message in the ZID


Sheet jogger D.S. The symbols appear in the display ”Delivery/
Warning”.

The symbols appear:


Sheet jogger O.S. – during positioning while the press is on ”Run”.

The symbols go off:


– when positioning is over and the press is on
”Run”,
– when one of the pushbuttons ”Sheet jogger
D.S.” or ”Sheet jogger O.S.” is actuated and
the press is on ”Run”.

111
Size adjustment 12M6/12M7 Sheet joggers D.S./O.S.

Place of installation

D.S. = 12M6
O.S. = 12M7

Delivery

Technical data
Motor data
– U = DC 24 V
– P = 5 W

Potentiometer data
– U = DC 10 V
– R = 10 K

112
Size adjustment 12M6/12M7 Sheet joggers D.S./O.S.

Interconnection diagram 12M6

X5
X10 SSR

SSR X10

X15 X16

X3 X4

X17 X18

SSR X17

Backplane of servo-drive
12
plug-in unit SSR

12LVT1

1SSM1: X2 X3 X4

1SSM1: X4
X2

X1 X5
1SSM1
Servo-drive distributor
module 1SSM1

3 4
5
12M6: X1
2 1

12M6

Servo-drive 12M6

12M6:X1 1SSM 1 SSR


+ Pin 1 X5: C1 X2: 1 X10: B26
– Pin 2 X5: C2 X2: 2 X10: D26
10V Pin 3 X5: C3 X4: 3 X17: 3
Pin 4 X5: C4 X4: 4 X17: 4
0V Pin 5 X5: C5 X4: 5 X17: 5

113
Size adjustment 12M6/12M7 Sheet joggers D.S./O.S.

Interconnection diagram 12M7

X5
X10 SSR

SSR X10

X15 X16

X3 X4

X17 X18
SSR X17

Backplane of servo-drive
12
plug-in unit SSR

12LVT1

X3 X4
1SSM1: X2

1SSM1: X4
X2

X1 X5
1SSM1
Servo-drive distributor
module 1SSM1

3 4
5
12M7: X1
2 1

12M7

Servo-drive 12M7

12M7:X1 1SSM 1 SSR


+ Pin 1 X5: D1 X2: 3 X10: B28
– Pin 2 X5: D2 X2: 4 X10: D28
10V Pin 3 X5: D3 X4: 8 X17: 8
Pin 4 X5: D4 X4: 7 X17: 7
0V Pin 5 X5: D5 X4: 6 X17: 6

114
Size adjustment 12M6/12M7 Sheet joggers D.S./O.S.

Removal and installation

 

Cam follower

Control cam

– Remove the servo-drive ”Sheet jogger D.S.” – Inch the press until the cam follower of the
12M6 (or ”Sheet jogger O.S.” 12M7). sheet jogger has reached the highest point of
the control cam.

– Set the distance between the sheet jogger


D.S. (or O.S.) and the side frame D.S. (or
O.S.) to 55 mm.

115
Size adjustment 12M6/12M7 Sheet joggers D.S./O.S.


4)

12M6: X1
12M7: X1

13 704 ± 2 14 704 ± 2

– Fit the gear wheel.


– Connect plug 12M6: X1 (or 12M7: X1).
– 12M6 (D.S.) = set to 704±2 inc.
12M7 (O.S.) = set to 704±2 inc.

 

1020

720
1.00

– Select the command ”Presetting”.


– Press the button ”Input”.
– The servo-drives position to the displayed
– Install the servo-drive. format.

116
Size adjustment 12M6/12M7 Sheet joggers D.S./O.S.

Checking the operating range


 Servo-drive ”Sheet jogger D.S.” 12M6
 Servo-drive ”Sheet jogger O.S.” 12M7

The indicated values are valid for both servo-


drives.
Sheet width: 1040 mm
Incremental value: 704 ± 3 inc
Sheet width: 420 mm
Incremental value: 3392 ± 3 inc

Service display ”Values, incremental values


servo-drives”

117
Size adjustment 12M6/12M7 Sheet joggers D.S./O.S.

118
Feeder pile control Block diagrams

Feeder pile control

Block diagrams

Block diagram (Preset)

Pile Switches and Controls


height sensors

Safety SEK EAK_11 Press control


circuit

REK2

ESK

Auxiliary drive HAK_01 HAK_02


control A B C A B C

A LTK500 B
A STK1 B
A BAK B

Main Auxiliary
M M
pile pile
11M1 11M2

Preset feeder with auxiliary pile

119
Feeder pile control Block diagrams

Block diagram (Standard)

Pile Switches and Controls


height sensors

Safety SEK EAK_11 Press control


circuit

REK2

ESK

Auxiliary drive HAK_01 HAK_02


control A B C A B C

A STK1 B A STK2 B

Main Auxiliary
M M pile
pile
11M1 11M2

Standard feeder with auxiliary pile

120
Feeder pile control Layout

Layout

Overview
The pile control of the feeder is used to control the
main pile and auxiliary pile. It consists of the
following functional units:
– Press control: Detection and evaluation of
input signals for controlling the pile drives
– Safety circuit: Detection and evaluation of
safety signals for the emergency shutdown of
pile drives
– Auxiliary drive control: Control of pile motors

The following components are part of the pile


control:
SEK Safety input board
EAK_11 Input/output board on board slot 11
(signal acquisition feeder)
REK2 Processor board on board slot 2
(press control)
ESK Input/output control board
HAK_01 Auxiliary drive board on board slot 1
HAK_02 Auxiliary drive board on board slot 2
STK1 Pile control board on board slot 1
STK2 Pile control board on board slot 2
BAK Brake control board
LTK500 Power part board 500W

121
Feeder pile control Layout

Press control
The press control detects the signals of the
switches and sensors on the feeder via the inputs
Inputs
of EAK_11. REK2 evaluates these signals and
generates control signals for the pile motors. The
control signals for pile motors are passed on to
the auxiliary drive control via the ESK.
EAK_11
The ESK is provided with the following operation
set for controlling the individual pile motors:
– Pile stop (pile height control off)
REK2
– Pile up (slow)
– Pile down (slow)
ESK – Pile up, fast (at main pile only)
– Pile down, fast (at main pile only)
– Pile height control on
Auxiliary drive control – Rack mode (parameter: rack height)

Press control

Safety circuit
The SEK registers the signals of those switches
on the feeder which are relevant to safety. It
Inputs
evaluates these signals and if necessary it
generates control signals for the emergency
shutdown of the pile drives. These control signals
are directly passed on to the auxiliary drive
SEK control.

The signals of the safety circuit always take


priority over the signals of the press control.
Auxiliary drive control
The ESK is provided with the following operation
set for controlling the individual pile motors:
Safety circuit – Pile drive enabled
– Pile up blocked
– Pile down blocked

122
Feeder pile control Layout

Auxiliary drive control

The auxiliary drive control conditions the control


signals of SEK and ESK and regulates the
Safety circuit Press control
individual pile drives.

Each drive is assigned with a control section


(component of a HAK) and a power part (depen-
dent on the motor used). Depending on the press
version, the assignments listed in the following are
HAK_01 HAK_02 possible - see also ”block diagrams”.

Control
LT LT Drive section Power part

Main pile HAK01 BAK+LTK500


M M (Preset) Part A Part A

11M1 11M2 Main pile HAK01 STK1


(standard) Part A Part A
Auxiliary drive control
Auxiliary pile HAK01 STK2
Part C Part A

The signal of the governor foot for controlling the


pile heights is conditioned in the power parts of
the main pile and of the auxiliary pile. Both power
parts pass the conditioned signal to the relevant
control section.

See chapter ”Control systems / auxiliary drive


control” for further information on auxiliary drive
control.

123
Feeder pile control Overview of components

Overview of components

Preset feeder

11M1 11S56

11S34 11S65
11M2
11S37
11S31
11B35

11S32

11S36

11B33
11B11
11S39

Components on the Preset feeder

124
Feeder pile control Overview of components

Standard feeder

11M1 11S33

11M2

11S34
11S37

11S36
11S32
11S65
11S31

11S35

11S39

Components on the standard feeder

125
Feeder pile control Overview of components

Motors
Equip- Function Preset Standard Remarks
ment
with without with without
non- non- non- non-
stop stop stop stop
11M1 Main pile drive (Preset) D D Brushless motor
11M1 Main pile drive (standard) D D Three-phase a.c. motor
11M2 Auxiliary pile drive D D

Switches and sensors


Equip- Function Preset Standard Remarks
ment with without with without
non- non- non- non-
stop stop stop stop
11B11 Auxiliary pile detection D
11S31 Suction head limitation D D D D
11S32 Upper pile safety D D D D
11S33 Upper main pile limitation D D
11B33 Upper main pile limitation D D
11S34 Bottom main pile limitation D D D D
11B35 Automatic pile transport D D
11S35 Automatic pile transport D D
11S36 Upper limitation of auxiliary pile D D
11S37 Bottom limitation of auxiliary D D
pile
11S39 Pile support plate limitation D D D D
11S56 Switching off the auxiliary pile D
11S65 Pile height control D D D D
(governor foot)

126
Feeder pile control Function

Function

Pile height control of main pile (Preset)


The automatic pile height control of the main pile
on the feeder is activated as soon as one of the
following conditions is met:
11S65
11B35 – The sensor ”automatic pile transport” (11B35)
detects paper when raising the main pile
(actuation of the button ”main pile up”,
11S24)
– The press turns, the feeder is engaged and
the sensor ”automatic pile transport” (11B35)
detects paper

With the automatic pile height control, the pile is


controlled so that the upper edge is always at the
level of the governor foot (11S65) - with governor
Switching points of main pile height control foot in vertical position. As soon as the sensor
detects too little paper on the pile, the pile is
moved upwards by a presettable height (the ”pile
Pile height control lift increment at the feeder” can be adjusted
between 0.5 mm and 2.5 mm on the ZID). The
Governor foot is positioned vertically
position of the governor foot can be altered by
11S65 detects too little paper means of the suction head height control.

Pile up (by the value set) The automatic pile height control on the feeder is
stopped under the following circumstances:
Sequence of main pile height control – actuation of an emergency stop switch
– actuation of the ”suction head limitation”
switch (11S31)
– actuation of the ”upper pile safety” switch
(11S32)
– actuation of the ”upper main pile limitation”
switch (11B33)
– actuation of the ”upper auxiliary pile limita-
tion” switch (11S36)
(only in case of non-stop)
– actuation of the ”pile stop” button (11S26)
– actuation of the ”main pile down” button
(11S25)
– Sheeter in operation
(extra accessory)
– The sensor ”automatic pile transport” (11B35)
does not detect any paper (only during the
first 30 sheets in the closed loop control)

127
Feeder pile control Function

Automatic pile height control of main pile (standard)


The automatic main pile height control on the
feeder is activated as soon as one of the following
conditions is met:
11S65
11S35 – The sensor ”automatic pile transport” (11S35)
detects paper when raising the main pile
(actuation of the button ”main pile up”,
11S24)
– The press turns, the feeder is engaged and
the switch ”automatic pile transport” (11S35)
detects paper

The pile is controlled by the automatic pile height


control so that its upper edge is always at the
level of the governor foot (11S65) - with vertically
Switching points of the automatic main pile positioned governor foot. As soon as the sensor
height control detects too little paper on the pile, the pile is
raised by the adjustable height (the ”pile lift
increment on the feeder” can be set between
Automatic pile height control
0.5 mm and 2.5 on the ZID). The position of the
Governor foot is positioned vertically
governor foot can be adjusted (manually) via the
suction head height control.
11S65 detects too little paper
The automatic pile height control on the feeder is
Pile up (by preset value) stopped under the following circumstances:
– actuation of an emergency stop switch
Sequence of the automatic pile height control for
– actuation of the ”suction head limitation”
the main pile
switch (11S31)
– actuation of the ”upper pile safety” (11S32)
– actuation of the ”upper main pile limitation”
switch (11S33)
– actuation of the ”upper auxiliary pile limita-
tion” switch (11S36)
(only in case of non-stop)
– actuation of the ”pile stop” button (11S26)
– actuation of the ”main pile down” switch
(11S25)
– sheeter in operation
(extra accessory)
– The sensor ”automatic pile transport” (11S35)
does not detect any paper (only during the
first 30 sheets in the closed-loop control)

128
Feeder pile control Function

Automatic pile height control of auxiliary pile


The automatic pile height control of auxiliary pile
on the feeder is activated as soon as the toggle
switch is in position ”auxiliary pile on” (11S27) and
11S65 the sensor/switch ”automatic pile transport”
11B35
(Preset: 11B35, standard: 11S35) detects paper.

The pile is controlled by the automatic pile height


control so that the upper edge of the pile is always
at the level of the governor foot (11S65) - with
governor foot positioned vertically. As soon as the
sensor detects too little paper on the pile, the pile
is raised by an adjustable height (the ”pile lift
increment on the feeder” can be adjusted between
0.5 mm and 2.5 mm on the control console
display ZID). The position of the governor foot can
Switching points of the automatic pile height be altered via the suction head height control.
control of auxiliary pile

The automatic pile height control at the feeder is


Automatic pile height control stopped under the following circumstances:
Governor foot is positioned vertically – actuation of an emergency stop switch
11S65 detects too little paper – actuation of the ”suction head limitation”
button (11S31)
Pile up (by preset value)
– actuation of the ”upper pile safety” switch
(11S32)
Sequence of the automatic pile height control for
– actuation of the ”upper auxiliary pile limita-
the auxiliary pile
tion” switch (11S36)
– actuation of the ”pile stop” button (11S26)
– actuation of the ”auxiliary pile down” button
(11S29)
– unloading the ”auxiliary pile detection” sensor
(11B11)
(only with Preset)
– sheeter in operation
(extra accessory)
– The sensor ”automatic pile transport” (11B35)
does not detect any paper.

129
Feeder pile control Function

Transport of main pile


Main pile up
11S24
The main pile can only be raised manually if the
automatic pile height control of the main pile is not
active.

The upwards movement of the main pile is


11B33 controlled via the button ”main pile up” (11S24) on
the feeder operation panel. If one of the following
circumstances is met upon actuation of the button,
the main pile moves upwards:
fast – The toggle switch (11S27) is in position
”auxiliary pile on”
– The sensor ”auxiliary pile detector” (11B11) is
damped
(only in case of non-stop with Preset)
– The toggle switch is in position ”auxiliary pile
Switching points of main pile up off” (11S27) and the ”automatic pile transport”
(Preset: 11B35, standard: 11S35) detects no
paper
Main pile up
When the pile support plate reaches the ”upper
Permissible start condition main pile limitation” (Preset: 11B33, standard:
11S24 (keep pressed) 11S33) or when the ”automatic pile transport”
(Preset: 11B35, standard: 11S35) detects paper,
Main pile up, fast the transport of the main pile stops.
– Preset: 11B33 or 11B35
The upwards movement of the main pile is
– Standard: 11S33 or 11S35 interrupted under the following circumstances:
Main pile stop – actuation of an emergency stop switch
– actuation of the ”suction head limitation”
Sequence of main pile up switch (11S31)
– actuation of the ”upper pile safety” switch
(11S32)
– actuation of the ”upper auxiliary pile limita-
tion” switch (11S36)
(only in case of non-stop)
– actuation of the ”main pile down” button
(11S25)
– actuation of the ”pile stop” button (11S26)
– sheeter in operation
(extra accessory)

The pile transport can only be continued if the


respective cause has been eliminated.

130
Feeder pile control Function

Main pile down


11S25 11S26
The downward movement of the main pile is
controlled via the button ”main pile down” (11S25)
on the feeder operation panel. The speed is
changed (slow/fast) depending on the position of
the main pile.

The button ”main pile down” (11S25) is furnished


with a self-stopping mode. If the button is
actuated, the main pile moves downwards at fast
speed. When it reaches the ”pile support plate
fast limitation” (11S39), the main pile stops.
In case of the preset version, the pile support
plate is automatically centered in this position
11S39 (maximum duration: 25 s). During this centering
slow process, the control does not respond to the
11S34 actuation of the ”main pile down” button (11S25).
Switching points of main pile down
If the ”main pile down” button (11S25) is actuated
again, the main pile (without self-stopping) moves
further downwards at slow speed. When it reaches
Main pile down
the ”bottom main pile limitation” (11S34), the main
Permissible start condition pile stops.

11S25 (self-stopping mode) The downward movement of the main pile is


interrupted if one of the following conditions is
Main pile down, fast
met:
11S39
– actuation of an emergency stop switch
– Preset: main pile stop and automatic – actuation of the ”lower end stop” switch
centering of the pile support plate (11S34)
– Standard: main pile stop
– actuation of the ”pile support plate limitation”
switch (11S39)
11S25 (no self-stopping mode)
– actuation of the ”pile stop” button (11S26)
Main pile down, slow
– actuation of the ”main pile up” button (11S24)
11S34
An interrupted pile transport can only be continued
Main pile stop after elimination of the cause.

Sequence of main pile down and passing both


speed ranges

131
Feeder pile control Function

Transport of auxiliary pile


Preconditions
The auxiliary pile can only be transported if the
switch ”switching off the auxiliary pile” (11S56) is
clear.
(Only with Preset)

Auxiliary pile up
11S28
The auxiliary pile can only be moved up manually,
if the automatic pile height control of the auxiliary
pile is not active.

The upwards movement of the auxiliary pile is


11S36 controlled via the button ”auxiliary pile up” (11S28)
on the feeder operation panel. The auxiliary pile
moves upwards at a constant speed. When it
fast reaches the ”upper auxiliary pile limitation”
(11S36), the transport mechanism of the auxiliary
pile stops.

The upwards movement of the auxiliary pile is


interrupted if one of the following conditions is
met:
– actuation of an emergency stop switch
Switching points of auxiliary pile up – actuation of the ”suction head limitation”
switch (11S31)
Auxiliary pile up – actuation of the ”upper pile safety” (11S32)

Permissible starting point


– actuation of the ”pile stop” button (11S26)
– actuation of the ”auxiliary pile down” button
11S28 (keep pressed)
(11S29)
Auxiliary pile up – sheeter is in operation
11S36 (extra accessory)

Auxiliary pile stop An interrupted pile transport can only be continued


after the respective cause has been eliminated.

Sequence of auxiliary pile up

132
Feeder pile control Function

Auxiliary pile down


11S29
The downwards movement of the auxiliary pile is
controlled via the button ”auxiliary pile down”
(11S29) on the delivery operation panel. The
auxiliary pile moves downwards at a constant
speed. When it reaches the ”bottom auxiliary pile
limitation” (11S37), the transport mechanism of the
auxiliary pile stops.

fast The downward movement of the auxiliary pile is


stopped if one of the following conditions is met:
– actuation of an emergency stop switch
11S37
– actuation of the ”upper main pile limitation”
sensor (11B33)
(only in case of Preset with non-stop)
– actuation of the ”pile stop” button (11S26)
Switching points of auxiliary pile down – actuation of the ”auxiliary pile up” button
(11S28)

Auxiliary pile down – sheeter is in operation


(extra accessory)
Permissible starting point
An interrupted pile transport can only be continued
11S29 (keep pressed)
if the respective cause has been eliminated.
Auxiliary pile down

11S37

Auxiliary pile stop

Sequence of auxiliary pile down

133
Feeder pile control Function

Non-stop operation (Preset)


Preconditions
The non-stop operation on the Preset feeder
requires the following preconditions:
– The press is in production mode
– The toggle switch (11S27) is in position
”auxiliary pile off”
– The non-stop bar is unhinged so that the
switch ”switching off the auxiliary pile”
(11S56) is clear
– The non-stop bar is at the level of the pile
board (starting position for inserting the
support rods)

Basic function
The non-stop operation on the Preset feeder
consists of the following sub-steps:
– Transfer of pile:
Inserting the support rods creates main and
auxiliary pile. The auxiliary pile takes over the
automatic pile height control
– Pile change:
The (empty) main pile moves downwards.
There it is loaded and moves back up to the
auxiliary pile
– Pile merging:
Main and auxiliary pile are merged by pulling
out the support rods. The main pile takes
over the automatic pile height control again.

134
Feeder pile control Function

Main pile Auxiliary pile

Automatic pile height control of main pile on Automatic pile height control of auxiliary pile off

Inserting support rods Inserting support rods


Pile transfer 11S27 auxiliary pile on

Auxiliary pile up, slow

11B11 damped 11B11 damped

– Automatic pile height control of main pile off – Auxiliary pile stop
– Awaiting starting point – Automatic pile height control of auxiliary pile on
– Main pile down, fast

11S39

– Main pile stop


– Centering main pile (automatically)

11S25 (no self-stopping mode)

Main pile down, slow

11S34

Pile change Main pile stop (loading)

11S24

Main pile up, fast

– Main pile stop


– Aligning main pile (manually)

11S24

Main pile up, fast

11B11 not damped

Automatic pile height control of main pile on

11S27 auxiliary pile off

Automatic pile height control of auxiliary pile off

Removing support rods Removing support rods


Pile
merging 11S29

Auxiliary pile down

11S37

Auxiliary pile stop

Sequence of non-stop operation (Preset)

135
Feeder pile control Function

Pile transfer
The support rods are inserted (manually) and the
toggle switch (11S27) is brought into the position
”auxiliary pile on”. The auxiliary pile moves
upwards until the sensor ”auxiliary pile detection”
(11B11) is damped. This activates the automatic
pile height control on the auxiliary pile and
deactivates it on the main pile.

When reaching the starting point (dependent on


the automatic pile height control of the auxiliary
pile), the main pile moves automatically down-
wards.

Pile change
The main pile stops when reaching the ”pile
support plate limitation” (11S39). In this position,
the pile support plate is automatically centered
(max. duration: 25 s).

When actuating the button ”main pile down”


(11S25), the main pile moves further downwards
at slow speed. When reaching the ”bottom limit
position” (11S34), the main pile stops and can be
loaded.

When actuating the button ”main pile up” (11S24),


the pile moves back upwards. The main pile must
be aligned manually just before it reaches the
auxiliary pile.

Pile merging
When reaching the auxiliary pile, the sensor
”auxiliary pile detection” (11B11) is no longer
damped, whereupon the automatic pile height
control of the main pile is activated again.

The toggle switch is put into the position ”auxiliary


pile off” (11S27), this deactivates the automatic
pile height control on the auxiliary pile. The
support rods are pulled out (manually). Upon
actuation of the button ”auxiliary pile down”
(11S29) the non-stop bars move downwards.
When reaching the ”bottom auxiliary pile limitation”
(11S37), the non-stop bars stop (starting position).

136
Feeder pile control Function

Non-stop operation (standard)


Preconditions
The non-stop operation on the standard feeder
requires the following preconditions:
– The press is in production mode.
– The toggle switch is in position ”auxiliary pile
off” (11S27)
– The non-stop bar is at the level of the pile
support board (starting position for inserting
the support rods)

Basic function
The non-stop operation on the standard feeder
consists of the following sub-steps:
– Pile transfer:
Inserting support rods creates main and
auxiliary pile. The auxiliary pile takes over the
automatic pile height control
– Pile change:
The (empty) main pile moves downwards.
There it is loaded and moves back up to the
auxiliary pile
– Pile merging:
Main and auxiliary pile are merged by pulling
out the support rods. The main pile takes
over the automatic pile height control again.

137
Feeder pile control Function

Main pile Auxiliary pile

Automatic pile height control of main pile on Automatic pile height control of auxiliary pile off

Inserting support rods Inserting support rods


Pile transfer 11S28

Auxiliary pile up, slow

11S27 Auxiliary pile on 11S27 auxiliary pile on

Automatic pile height control of main pile off Automatic pile height control of auxiliary pile on

11S25 (self-stopping mode)

Main pile down, fast

11S39

Main pile stop

11S25 (no self-stopping mode)

Pile change Main pile down, slow

11S34

Main pile stop (loading)


11S24

Main pile up, fast

Height of auxiliary pile reached

Main pile stop

11S27 auxiliary pile off 11S27 auxiliary pile off

Automatic pile height control of main pile on Automatic pile height control of auxiliary pile off

Removing support rods Removing support rods

Pile 11S29
merging
Auxiliary pile down

11S37

Auxiliary pile stop

Sequence of non–stop operation (standard)

138
Feeder pile control Function

Pile transfer
The support rods are inserted (manually). Through
actuation of the ”auxiliary pile up” button (11S28),
the non-stop bars are moved upwards (until the
support rods are slightly lifted). The toggle switch
(11S27) is brought into position ”auxiliary pile on”,
this activates the automatic pile height control on
the auxiliary pile and deactivates it on the main
pile.

Pile change
When actuating the button ”main pile down”
(11S25), the main pile moves in self-stopping
mode downwards at fast speed. The main pile
stops when reaching the ”pile support plate
limitation” (11S39).

When actuating the button ”main pile down”


(11S25) once more, the main pile (without
self-stopping mode) moves downwards at slow
speed. When reaching the ”bottom limitation”
(11S34) the main pile stops and can be loaded.

When actuating the button ”main pile up” (11S24),


the main pile moves upwards at fast speed. The
main pile must be moved up to the auxiliary pile,
so that the auxiliary pile is relieved.

Pile merging
The toggle switch is put into position ”auxiliary pile
off” (11S27), this reactivates the automatic pile
height control on the main pile and deactivates it
on the auxiliary pile. The support rods are pulled
out (manually). When actuating the button
”auxiliary pile down” (11S29), the non-stop bars
move downwards. When reaching the ”bottom
limitation of auxiliary pile” (11S37), the non-stop
bars stop (starting position).

139
Feeder pile control 11M1 Main pile motor (Preset)

11M1 Main pile motor (Preset)

Place of installation

11M1

Place of installation of main pile motor (Preset)

Layout
 Motor electronics
 Motor and brake
 Gear unit
 Male connector

Layout of main pile motor (Preset)

140
Feeder pile control 11M1 Main pile motor (Preset)

Task and function


The main pile motor moves the main pile upwards
and downwards by means of pile chains.

A brushless motor is used which can perform the


following functions:
– Speed control
– Changeover between two different speed
levels (”fast” and ”slow”)
– Electric deceleration (controlled by the
respective power part)
– Stopping or emergency braking by means of
the brake installed

The motor is provided with the following internal


functions for the purpose of controlling and
monitoring:
– Commutation and speed detection by means
of Hall signals
– Temperature detection through resistor

Technical specifications
– Output: 0.18/0.36 kW
– Power supply: DC 120 V
– Speed (gear unit): 5.7/40 min–1
– Ratio: 100:1
– Resistor code: 2 (560 W)

141
Feeder pile control 11M1 Main pile motor (Preset)

Pin assignment

Pin Function
A1 X1 motor line (slow)
A B C B1 Y1 motor line (slow)
1 1
C1 Z1 motor line (slow)
2 2
3 3 A2 X2 motor line (fast)
4 4 B2 Y2 motor line (fast)
5 5 C2 Z2 motor line (fast)
C5 Brake (reference potential DC)
B5 Brake (DC +24 V)
B4 Hall 1
A5 Hall 2
Pin assignment on main pile motor (Preset) B3 Hall 3
A4 Resistor code
A3 PTC (temperature monitoring)
C4 Auxiliary supply of motor electronics UH
C3 Ground auxiliary supply
PE conductor

142
Feeder pile control 11M1 Main pile motor (standard)

11M1 Main pile motor (standard)

Place of installation

11M1

Place of installation of main pile motor (standard)

Layout

 Motor electronics
 Motor and brake
 Gear unit
 Male connector

Layout of main pile motor (standard)

143
Feeder pile control 11M1 Main pile motor (standard)

Task and function


The main pile motor moves the main pile upwards
and downwards by means of the pile chains.

A three-phase induction motor is used which


carries out the following functions:
– Changeover between two different speed
levels (”fast” and ”slow”)
– Stopping and emergency braking by means
of the brake installed

The motor is provided with the following internal


functions for the purpose of controlling and
monitoring:
– Speed detection via Hall signals
– Temperature detection via resistor

Technical specifications
– Output: 0.13/0.42 kW
– Power supply: 220 V / 50 Hz
265 V / 60 Hz
– Speed (gear unit): 9.5/41.5 min–1 (220V)
11.5/49.7 min–1 (265V)
– Ratio: 66:1
– Resistor code: 2 (560 W)

144
Feeder pile control 11M1 Main pile motor (standard)

Pin assignment

Pin Function
A1 Winding U1 (slow)
B1 Winding V1 (slow)
A B C
1 C1 Winding W1 (slow)
2 A2 Winding U2 (fast)
3 B2 Winding V2 (fast)
4 C2 Winding W2 (fast)
5 A3 N1, N2
B5 Brake (reference potential DC)
C5 Brake (DC +24 V)
B4 Hall 1
pin assignment of main pile motor (standard) A5 Hall 2
C3 Resistor code
B3 PTC (temperature monitoring)
C4 Auxiliary voltage of motor electronics UH
A4 Ground auxiliary voltage
PE conductor

145
Feeder pile control 11M2 Auxiliary pile motor

11M2 Auxiliary pile motor

Place of installation

11M2
11M2

Preset feeder Standard feeder

Place of installation of auxiliary pile motor

Layout
 Motor electronics
 Motor and brake
 Gear unit
 Male connector

Layout auxiliary pile motor

146
Feeder pile control 11M2 Auxiliary pile motor

Task and function


The auxiliary pile motor moves the auxiliary pile
upwards and downwards by means of the pile
chains.

A three-phase induction motor is used which can


execute the following functions:
– Changeover between two different speed
levels (”fast” and ”slow”)
– Stopping and emergency braking by means
of the brake installed

The motor is provided with the following internal


functions for the purpose of controlling and
monitoring:
– Speed detection via Hall signals
– Temperature detection via resistor

Technical specifications
– Output: 0.09/0.4 kW
– Power supply: 220 V / 50 Hz
265 V / 60 Hz
– Speed (gear unit): 11.3/48.4 min–1 (220V)
13.9/58.7 min–1 (265V)
– Ration: 57:1
– Resistor code: 8 (56 kW)

147
Feeder pile control 11M2 Auxiliary pile motor

Pin assignment

Pin Function
A1 Winding U1 (slow)
B1 Winding V1 (slow)
A B C
1 C1 Winding W1 (slow)
2 A2 Winding U2 (fast)
3 B2 Winding V2 (fast)
4 C2 Winding W2 (fast)
5 A3 N1, N2
B5 Brake (reference potential DC)
C5 Brake (DC +24 V)
B4 Hall 1
Pin assignment main pile motor (standard) A5 Hall 2
C3 Resistor code
B3 PTC (temperature monitoring)
C4 Auxiliary voltage motor electronics UH
A4 Ground auxiliary voltage
PE conductor

148
Feeder pile control 11B11 Auxiliary pile detection

11B11 Auxiliary pile detection

Place of installation

11B11

Place of installation 11B11 (Preset feeder)

Layout
 Sensor
 Cable

Sensor 11B11 with cable

149
Feeder pile control 11B11 Auxiliary pile detection

Task and function


The inductive sensor 11B11 monitors whether the
non-stop bar is loaded.

In case of a loaded non-stop bar, the auxiliary pile


presses a trip bar downwards. The sensor detects
the trip bar (metal).

Switching output: normally open contact

Connection

Core colour Function Terminal

11B11 brown + 24V DC 12X2: +1

blue 24V DC 12X2: –1

black signal FEM64: XE11

Cable end sensor 11B11

Removal and installation

The sensor is screwed down to a base plate


which is located at the non-stop bar.

Removal and installation 11B11

150
Feeder pile control 11B11 Auxiliary pile detection

Setting

In its basic setting the sensor protrudes the base

ÁÁÁ
plate by 14 mm (see figure).

ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
14 –0.2 mm

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁ

Setting 11B11

Checking the circuit state


The output signal of the sensor 11B11 reaches the
EAK_11 EAK_11, input 11.
E11
11B11

Signal flow

 Position signal E11

The input signal E11 can be checked on the


service display EAK:
0: The sensor detects no metal (the trip bar is
unloaded)
1: The sensor detects metal (the trip bar is
loaded)

Service display, signal E11

151
Feeder pile control 11B33 Upper main pile limitation

11B33 Upper main pile limitation

Place of installation

11B33

Place of installation 11B33 (Preset feeder)

Layout
 Sensor
 Cable

Sensor 11B33 with cable

152
Feeder pile control 11B33 Upper main pile limitation

Task and function

The inductive sensor 11B33 monitors whether the


pile support plate has reached the uppermost
position.

The sensor detects the pile support plate (metal).

Switching output: normally closed contact

Connection

Core colour Function Terminal

11B33 brown + 24V DC 12X2: +1

blue 24V DC 12X2: –1

black signal FEM64: XE33

Cable end sensor 11B33

Removal and installation


The sensor is screwed down to the non-stop bar.

Removal and installation 11B33

153
Feeder pile control 11B33 Upper main pile limitation

Setting

In its normal position the sensor protrudes the


non-stop bar by 24 mm (see figure).

24 mm

Setting 11B33

Checking the circuit state


The output signal of the sensor 11B33 reaches
EAK_11 EAK_11, input 33.
E33
11B33

Signal flow

 Position signal E33

The input signal E33 can be checked on the


service display EAK:
0: The sensor detects metal (the pile support
plate is located at level of the sensor)
1: The sensor detects no metal (the pile support
plate is located below the sensor)

Service display, signal E33

154
Feeder pile control 11B35 Automatic pile transport

11B35 Automatic pile transport

Place of installation

11B35

Place of installation 11B35 (Preset feeder)

Layout
 Sensor
 Cable

Sensor 11B35 with cable

155
Feeder pile control 11B35 Automatic pile transport

Task and function


The capacitive sensor 11B35 detects whether the
upper edge of the pile (paper) is at the respective
height.

Switching output: normally open contact

Connection

Core colour Function Terminal

11B35 brown + 24V DC 12X2: +1

blue 24V DC 12X2: –1

black signal FEM64: XE35

Cable end sensor 11B35

Removal and installation


The sensor 11B35 is screwed down to the pile
support frame in a special holder.

When installing the cable make sure that no


moveable parts are touched (risk of wearing
through). The tape driving shaft is particularly
critical.

Removal and installation 11B35

156
Feeder pile control 11B35 Automatic pile transport

Checking the circuit state


The output signal of the sensor 11B35 reaches
EAK_11 EAK_11, input 35.
E35
11B35

Signal flow

 Position signal E35

The input signal E35 can be checked on the


service display:
0: The sensor does not detect an object (the
upper edge of pile is below the sensor)
1: The sensor detects an object (the upper edge
of pile is at the level of the sensor)

Service display, signal E35

157
Feeder pile control 11S34 Bottom main pile limitation

11S34 Bottom main pile limitation

Place of installation

11S34

11S34

Preset feeder Standard feeder


Components

Place of installation 11S34

Task and function

The position switch 11S34 deactivates the pile


drive when the main pile has reached its lowest
position.

There is a trip cam at the pile change which


actuates the position switch via a shifter mecha-
nism.

158
Feeder pile control 11S34 Bottom main pile limitation

Setting

To set the ”bottom main pile limitation”, the main


pile chains must be shortened or lengthened
accordingly. The position switch 11S34 must not
be changed.

Basically the following procedure for shortening or


lengthening the main pile chains applies.
Furthermore, the instructions and safety hints of
the ”service manual for the mechanics” are to be
obeyed.
 Lower the pile support plate of the feeder
until the pile support plate rests on the floor
or on an elevation (e.g. pallets) and the pile
chains are relaxed
 Lengthen or shorten the main pile chains
accordingly

Checking the circuit state


The output signal of the switch 11S34 reaches
EAK_11 EAK_11, input 34.
E34
11S34

Signal flow

 Position signal E34

The input signal E34 can be checked on the


service display EAK:
0: switch is actuated
1: switch is not actuated

Note:
The signal is also displayed on the service display
SEK.

Service display, signal E34

159
Feeder pile control 11S34 Bottom main pile limitation
Components

160
Delivery pile control Block diagrams

Delivery pile control

Block diagrams

Block diagram (Preset)

Pile Switches and Controls Outputs


height sensors

SEK EAK_12
Safety Press control
circuit

REK2

ESK

HAK_01 HAK_02
Auxiliary A B C A B C
drive control

A LTK500 B
A LTK50 B
A BAK B

Main M M Auxiliary
pile pile
12M1 12M2

Preset delivery with auxiliary pile

161
Delivery pile control Block diagrams

Block diagram (standard)

Pile Switches and Controls Outputs


height sensors

Safety SEK EAK_12 Press control


circuit

REK2

ESK

HAK_01 HAK_02
Auxiliary A B C A B C
drive control

A STK1 B A LTK50 B

Main Auxiliary
M M
pile pile
12M1 12M2

Standard delivery with auxiliary pile

162
Delivery pile control Layout

Layout

Overview
The pile control of the delivery is used to control
main pile and auxiliary pile and other outputs
(solenoid-operated valves). It consists of the
following functional units:
– Press control: recording and evaluating input
signals for controlling the pile drives and
outputs
– Safety circuit: recording and evaluating
safety-relevant signals for emergency
shutdown of pile drives
– Auxiliary drive control: control of pile motors

The following components are part of the pile


control:
SEK Safety input board
EAK_12 Input/output board on board slot 12
(signal acquisition delivery)
REK2 Processor board on board slot 2
(press control)
ESK Input/output control board
HAK_01 Auxiliary drive board on board slot 1
HAK_02 Auxiliary drive board on board slot 2
STK1 Pile control board on board slot 1
BAK Brake control board
LTK500 Power part board 500W
LTK50 Power part board 50W

163
Delivery pile control Layout

Press control
The press control records the signals of the
switches and sensors on the delivery and the
Inputs Outputs
delivery controls via the inputs of EAK_12. REK2
evaluates these signals and generates control
signals for the pile motors and solenoid-operated
valves. The solenoid-operated valves are
EAK_12 controlled via the outputs of EAK_12. The control
signals for the pile motors are passed on to the
auxiliary drive control via the ESK.

REK2 The ESK has the following operation set for


controlling the individual pile motors:
– Pile stop (pile height control off)
ESK – Pile up (slow)
– Pile down (slow)
– Pile up, fast (only for main pile)
Auxiliary drive control – Pile down, fast (only for main pile)
– Pile height control on
Press control
– Rack mode (parameter: rack height)

Safety circuit
The SEK detects the signals of the safety-relevant
switches on the delivery. It evaluates these signals
Inputs
and if necessary it generates control signals for
the emergency shutdown of pile drives. These
control signals are passed on directly to the
auxiliary drive control.
SEK
The signals of the safety circuit take priority over
the signals of the press control.

The ESK is provided with the following operation


Auxiliary drive control
set for controlling the individual pile motors:
– Pile drive enabled
Safety circuit
– Pile up blocked
– Pile down blocked

164
Delivery pile control Layout

Auxiliary drive control

The auxiliary drive control prepares the control


signals of SEK and ESK and controls the
Safety circuit Press
individual pile drives.
control
Each drive is assigned with a control section
(component of a HAK) and a power part (depen-
dent on the motor used). Depending on the press
version, the assignments listed below are possible
HAK_01 HAK_02 - see also ”block diagrams”.

Control
LT LT LT Drive section Power part

Main pile HAK01 BAK+LTK500


M M M (Preset) Part B Part B

12M1 12M2 12M2 Main pile HAK01 STK1


(standard) Part B Part B
Auxiliary drive control
Auxiliary pile HAK02 LTK50
(with auxiliary Part A Part A
pile at feeder)

Auxiliary pile HAK01 LTK50


(no auxiliary Part C Part A
pile at feeder)

The signal of the capacitive sensor for the


automatic pile height control is prepared in the
power part of the main pile. The prepared signals
is passed on to the power part of the auxiliary
pile. Both power parts pass the signal on to the
corresponding control section.

See chapter ”control systems / auxiliary drive


control” for further details about the auxiliary drive
control.

165
Delivery pile control Overview of components

Overview of components

Operator side

12S130
12S56 12S33
12S55 12Y14/15
12B69
12S34
12S131 12Y49
12S42
12S41 12S35
12B129a

12Y60/61 12Y11
12S34b 12Y13
12B129
12S42
12S117

12B65

Components on the operator side

166
Delivery pile control Overview of components

Drive side

12M1
12M2
12S39
12S55a

12S130a
12Y62
12S36

12S34a
12S38

Components on the drive side

167
Delivery pile control Overview of components

Motors
Equip- Function Preset Standard Remarks
ment with without with without
non- non- non- non-
stop stop stop stop
12M1 Main pile drive (Preset) D D Brushless motor
12M1 Main pile drive (standard) D D Three-phase a.c. motor
12M2 Auxiliary pile drive D D

Switches and sensors


Equip- Function Preset Standard Remarks
ment with without with without
non- non- non- non-
stop stop stop stop
12S33 Upper main pile limitation D D
12S34 Bottom main pile limitation D D D D
12S34a Bottom main pile limitation D D D D only with raised deli-
very, same function as
12S34
12S34b Bottom main pile limitation D D D D only with raised deli-
very, same function as
12S34
12S35 Sheet jogger 1 D D D D
12S36 Sheet jogger 2 D D D D
12S38 Overshooting control D D D D
12S39 Monitoring suction drum D D D D
12S41 Pile rake stop D D
12S42 Pile rake down D D – with board fitting
on D.S.
– with rake fitting
on O.S.
12S55 Upper auxiliary pile limitation D D
12S55a Upper auxiliary pile limitation D D same function as
12S55
12S56 Bottom auxiliary pile limitation D D
12B65 Changeover fast/slow D D
12B69 Pile height control D D D D
12S117 – switching point 1: D D
changeover fast/slow
– switching point 2:
upper main pile limitation
12B129 Upper edge of pile at delivery D D Receiver (light barrier)
12B129a Upper edge of pile at delivery D D Transmitter (light bar-
rier)
12S130 Angular stop O.S. D D D D
12S130a Angular stop D.S. D D D D same function as
12S130
12S131 Pile down, slow D D D D

168
Delivery pile control Overview of components

Solenoid-operated valves
Equip- Function Preset Standard Remarks
ment with without with without
non- non- non- non-
stop stop stop stop
12Y11 Sheet stop D D D D
12Y13 Sheet catcher D D D D
12Y14 Supporting cross bar on D D only with rake
12Y15 Supporting cross bar off D D only with rake
12Y49 Locking of sheet stops D D D D
12Y60 Rack delivery on D D only with board
12Y61 Rack delivery off D D only with board
12Y62 Suction air sheet catcher D D D D

169
Delivery pile control Function

Function

Automatic pile height control


The automatic pile height control on the delivery is
automatically activated as soon as one of the
following conditions is met:
– The height control for the main pile at the
feeder is on
12B69
– The automatic pile height control for the
auxiliary pile control on the feeder is on
– The paper run is switched on
– The sheeter is in operation
(extra accessory)

The automatic pile height control on the feeder is


stopped under the following circumstances:
Switching points of the automatic pile height control – Actuation of the ”pile stop” button (12S124)
– Actuation of the ”main pile up” (12S45) or
Automatic pile height control ”main pile down” (12S46) button
(main pile only)
Permissible start condition
– Actuation of the ”auxiliary pile up” (12S53) or
12B69 detects paper ”auxiliary pile down” (12S54) button
(auxiliary pile only)
Pile down (by 2 mm)
– Opening of the sheet stop (12Y11)

Sequence of automatic pile height control Under normal circumstances the automatic pile
height control refers to the main pile. In addition,
the automatic pile height control at the auxiliary
pile is activated and deactivated in non-stop
operation (see chapter ”non-stop operation”).

The automatic pile height control controls the pile


in such a way that the upper edge is always at the
level of the sensor ”automatic pile height control”
(12B69). As soon as the sensor detects the upper
edge of the pile (paper), the pile is lowered by
2 mm.

In case the sensor ”automatic pile height control”


(12B69) fails to work, an emergency control is
automatically activated. With this emergency
control, the delivery pile is moved downwards
synchronously to the feeder pile.

170
Delivery pile control Function

Transport of main pile (Preset)


On the Preset version, the main pile is driven by a
brushless motor by means of which three speed
levels are passed.

Main pile up
12S45
The upwards movement of the main pile is
controlled by means of the button ”main pile up”
(12S45) on the delivery operation panel. Depend-
ing on the position of the main pile, the speed is
changed (fast/slow). When reaching the ”upper
main pile limitation” (12S117/switching point 2) or
12S117/2 the ”automatic pile transport” (12B69), the
12B69 transport mechanism of the main pile stops.
slow
12S117/1
12B65 The upwards movement of the main pile is
interrupted under the following circumstances:
fast
– Actuation of an emergency stop switch
12S131 – Actuation of the ”overshooting control” switch
slow (12S38)
– Actuation of the ”sheet jogger” switch (12S35
Switching points of main pile up (Preset) or 12S36)
– Actuation of the ”monitoring suction drum”
switch (12S39)
Main pile up
– Actuation of the ”angular stop” switch
Permissible start condition (12S130)
12S45 (keep pressed) – Opening of the sheet stop (12Y11)
(only if no non-stop operation)
Main pile up, slow
– Actuation of the ”main pile down” button
12S131 (12S46)
Main pile up, fast The continuation of an interrupted pile transport is
12B65 or 12S117/1 only possible after elimination of the respective
cause.
Main pile up, slow

12B69 or 12S117/2

Main pile stop

Sequence of main pile up and passes through


all three speed levels (Preset)

171
Delivery pile control Function

Main pile down


12S46 12S124
The downward movement of the main pile is
controlled by means of the button ”main pile
down” (12S46) on the delivery operation panel.
Depending on the position of the main pile, the
speed is changed (fast/slow).
The button ”main pile down” (12S46) is equipped
with a self-stopping mode. If the button was
slow
actuated for more than 1.5 s, the main pile moves
12S117/1 down to the ”bottom main pile limitation” (12S34).
12B65 The self-stopping mode can be interrupted by
means of the button ”pile stop” (12S124).
fast

The downward movement of the main pile is


12S131 interrupted under the following circumstances:
slow
12S34 – Actuation of an emergency stop switch
– Actuation of the ”pile stop” button (12S124)
Switching point of main pile down (Preset)
– Actuation of the ”main pile up” button
(12S45)
Main pile down
The interrupted pile transport can only be
Permissible start condition continued after elimination of the respective
12S46 (self-stopping mode after 1.5 s)
cause.

Main pile down, slow

12B65 or 12S117/1

Main pile down, fast

12S131

Main pile down, slow

12S34

Main pile stop

Sequence of main pile down and passing


through all three speed levels (Preset)

172
Delivery pile control Function

Transport of main pile (standard)


On the standard version the main pile is driven by
a three-phase a.c. motor, by means of which two
speed levels are passed.

Main pile up
12S45
The upwards movement of the main pile is
controlled by means of the button ”main pile up”
(12S45) on the delivery operation panel. The main
pile moves upwards at a constant speed (fast).
When reaching the ”upper main pile limitation”
(12S33) or the ”automatic pile transport” (12B69),
12S33
the transport mechanism of the main pile stops.
12B69
The upwards movement of the main pile is
interrupted under the following circumstances:
fast – Actuation of an emergency stop switch
– Actuation of the ”overshooting control” switch
(12S38)
– Actuation of the ”sheet jogger” switch (12S35
or 12S36)
Switching points of main pile up (standard) – Actuation of the ”monitoring suction drum”
switch (12S39)
Main pile up – Actuation of the ”angular stop” switch
(12S130)
Permissible start condition
– Opening of the sheet stop (12Y11)
12S45 (keep pressed) (only if no non-stop operation)
Main pile up, fast – Actuation of the ”main pile down” button
(12S46)
12S33 or 12B69
An interrupted pile transport can only be continued
Main pile stop
after elimination of the respective cause.

Sequence of main pile up (standard)

173
Delivery pile control Function

Main pile down


12S46 12S124
The downward movement of the main pile is
controlled by means of the button ”main pile
down” (12S46) on the delivery operation panel.
Depending on the position of the main pile, the
speed is changed (fast/slow). When reaching the
”bottom limit position” (12S34), the transport
mechanism of the main pile stops.

The button ”main pile down” (12S46) is provided


with a self-stopping mode. If the button was
fast actuated for more than 1.5 s, the main pile moves
down to the ”bottom main pile limitation” (12S34).
The self-stopping mode can be interrupted by
12S131 means of the button ”pile stop” (12S124).
slow
12S34 The downward movement of the main pile can be
interrupted under the following circumstances:
Switching points of main pile down (standard)
– Actuation of an emergency stop switch
– Actuation of the ”pile stop” button (12S124)
Main pile down – Actuation of the ”main pile up” button
(12S45)
Permissible start condition

12S46 (self-stopping mode after 1.5 s) An interrupted pile transport can only be continued
after elimination of the respective cause.
Main pile down, fast

12S131

Main pile down, slow

12S34

Main pile stop

Sequence of main pile down and passing


through both speed levels (standard)

174
Delivery pile control Function

Transport of auxiliary pile


Auxiliary pile up
12S53
The upward movement of the auxiliary pile is
controlled by means of the button ”auxiliary pile
up” (12S53) on the delivery operation panel. The
auxiliary pile moves upwards at a constant speed.
When reaching the ”upper auxiliary pile limitation”
(12S55), the transport of the auxiliary pile stops.

12S55 The upward movement of the auxiliary pile is


interrupted under the following circumstances:
– Actuation of an emergency stop switch
– Actuation of the ”overshooting control” switch
(12S38)
– Actuation of the ”sheet jogger” switch (12S35
or 12S36)
– Actuation of the ”monitoring suction drum”
Switching points of auxiliary pile up switch (12S39)
– Actuation of the ”angular stop” switch
Auxiliary pile up (12S130)
– Triggering of the sensor ”automatic pile
Permissible start condition
height control” (12B69)
12S53 (keep pressed)
– Opening of the sheet stop (12Y11)
Auxiliary pile up
(only if no non-stop operation)

12S55
– Actuation of the ”auxiliary pile down” button
(12S54)
Auxiliary pile stop
An interrupted pile transport can only be continued
after elimination of the respective cause.
Sequence of auxiliary pile up

175
Delivery pile control Function

Auxiliary pile down


12S54
The downward movement of the auxiliary pile is
controlled by means of the button ”auxiliary pile
down” (12S54) on the delivery operation panel.
The auxiliary pile moves downwards at a constant
speed. When reaching the ”bottom auxiliary pile
limitation” (12S56), the transport mechanism of the
auxiliary pile stops.

The downward movement of the auxiliary pile is


interrupted under the following circumstances:
12S56 – Actuation of an emergency stop switch
– Actuation of the ”angular stop” switch
(12S130)
– Actuation of the ”auxiliary pile up” button
(12S53)
Switching points of auxiliary pile down An interrupted pile transport can only be continued
after elimination of the respective cause.
Auxiliary pile down

Permissible start condition

12S54 (keep pressed)

Auxiliary pile down

12S56

Auxiliary pile stop

Sequence of auxiliary pile down

176
Delivery pile control Function

Non-stop operation
Basic function
The separation of pile occurs in non-stop
operation by means of rake or board in the main
pile and auxiliary pile. The auxiliary pile takes over
the automatic pile height control, the main pile
executes a pile change or a rack formation. After
that the two piles are remerged.

The rack function is a special version of the


non-stop operation which is selected and adjusted
(if available) by means of the control console.

Besides main and auxiliary pile further compo-


nents are involved in the non-stop operation:
– Sheet catcher
– Sheet stop front edge
(only with rake)
– Supporting cross bar
(only with rake)
– Guide rails
(only with board)

177
Delivery pile control Function

Main pile Auxiliary pile

Permissible start condition Permissible start condition

12S42

Main pile down, fast


Pile
separation – Pile change: 12S41 or 12B129
– Rack: adjusted rack height

Main pile stop (insert rake/board) (insert rake/board)

45 mm paper on auxiliary pile 45 mm paper on auxiliary pile

Automatic pile height control of main pile on Automatic pile height control of auxiliary pile on

12S46 (self-stopping)

Main pile down, fast

12S131

Main pile down, slow


Pile change
(rack) 12S34

Main pile stop (unloading)

12S45

Main pile up, slow

12S131

Main pile up, fast

– Rake: 12B129 – Rake: 12B129


– Board: 12S41 free – Board: 12S41 free

Automatic pile height control of main pile off Automatic pile height control of auxiliary pile
Pile (pull out rake/board) off (pull out rake/board)
merging
Time delay 10 s – Rake: 12S42 free
– Board: 12S10 actuated

Automatic pile height control of main pile on Auxiliary pile up

12S55 (starting position)

Auxiliary pile stop

Sequence of non-stop operation

178
Delivery pile control Function

Note:
The following must be observed with the
sequence of the non-stop operation (see figure):
– The steps for unloading are omitted with the
rake function
– Not all speed alterations are executed in
case of the standard version

Pile separation
When putting on the rake/board (12S42), the main
pile moves downwards at fast speed. The main
pile stops under the following circumstances:
12S41 – Pile change: Inserting the rake/board (12S41)
12B129
or lowering the upper edge of pile until it is at
the level of the light barrier (12B129)
– rake: When reaching the preset rake height
(the rake height can be adjusted on the ZID
between 20 mm and 300 mm in increments
of 10 mm)

As soon as 45 mm of paper are placed on the


auxiliary pile, main and auxiliary pile execute pile
12S42 12S41 height regulations.

Switching points for pile separation and pile Pile change


merging The main pile moves downwards in self-stopping
mode by pressing the button ”main pile down”
(12S46, for more than 1.5 s). After the main pile
has been emptied it moves back to the level of the
auxiliary pile when actuating the button ”main pile
up” (12S45).

When moving upwards and downwards the main


pile runs through the same speed levels as
described in the paragraph ”Transport of main
pile”.

Rack
After positioning the rack, the main pile moves
back to the level of the auxiliary pile by actuation
of the button ”main pile up” (12S45) .

179
Delivery pile control Function

Pile merging
The main pile moves upwards until the corre-
sponding condition is met.
– Rake: the upper edge of the pile has reached
the height of the light barrier (12B129)
– Board: the main pile lifts the board from
underneath (12S41 free)

The automatic pile height control for main and


auxiliary pile is interrupted for 10 seconds. Within
this period, the rake/ board can be pulled out.
Then the main pile takes over the automatic pile
height control again. The auxiliary pile frame
moves upwards back into its basic position.

In case of the version with board, the guide rails


must be retracted in addition - see paragraph
”guide rails”.

Sheet catcher
When separating the pile, the sheet catchers
retain the paper coming from above, this activity is
supported by suction air activated in addition.

When putting on the rake/board (12S42), the main


pile moves downwards (see ”pile separation”). If
the preset moment of application is reached, the
sheet catchers extend (12Y13) and the suction air
is switched on (12Y62). The moment of applica-
tion can be adjusted on the ZID within a range of
1 to 9 press rotations.

When inserting the rake/board (12S41), the


Extending and retracting sheet catcher suction air is switched off (12Y62) and the sheet
catchers retract (12Y13).
Sheet catcher

Permissible start condition

12S42

Main pile down

Moment of application reached

– Extending sheet catcher (12Y13)


– Suction air on (12Y62)

12S41

– Suction air off (12Y62)


– Retracting sheet catcher (12Y13)

Sequence of extending and retracting sheet


catcher

180
Delivery pile control Function

Front edge sheet stop (with rake)


The front edge sheet stop is locked during the
entire non-stop operation with rake. The locking
facility can also be operated manually on the
control console.

After putting on the rake (12S42), the locking


facility is switched on (12Y49). When pulling out
the rake (12S42 free), the locking facility is
switched off again (12Y49).

Front edge sheet stop

Front edge sheet stop

Permissible start condition

12S42

Sheet stop locked (12Y49)

12S42 free

Sheet stop released (12Y49)

Sequence of front edge sheet stop

181
Delivery pile control Function

Supporting cross bar (with rake)


The supporting cross bar is needed for the
non-stop operation with rake to put on the rods of
the rake. Dependent on the press-specific version,
there are two different options for controlling the
supporting cross bar.

– Without time delay:


When putting on the rake (12S42), the
supporting cross bar extends (12Y14). When
pulling out the rake (12S41 and 12S42 free)
the supporting cross bar retracts again
(12Y15).

Extending and retracting supporting cross bar – With time delay:


When inserting the rake (12S41 and 12S42)
the supporting cross bar extends after
Cross bar without delay time 3 seconds (12Y14). When pulling out the
rake (12S41 and 12S42 free) the supporting
Permissible start condition cross bar retracts again (12Y15).
12S42

Extending cross bar (12Y14)

Pile change or forming a rack

12S41 and 12S42 free

Retracting cross bar (12Y15)

Sequence of extending and retracting support-


ing cross bar (without delay time)

Cross bar with delay time

Permissible start condition

12S41 and 12S42

– Await time (3 s)
– Extending cross bar (12Y14)

Pile change or forming a rack

12S41 and 12S42 free

Retracting cross bar (12Y15)

Sequence of extending and retracting support-


ing cross bar (with delay time)

182
Delivery pile control Function

Guide rails (with board)


12S10
The guide rails are needed for the non-stop
operation with board to act as a lateral support of
the board.

By pressing the button ”pile board on/off” (12S10)


the guide rails extend (12Y60). After that the
board can be inserted in the guide rails. After
completion of the unloading process or after
insertion of spacer angles for a rack, the main pile
moves back to the height of the auxiliary pile
(12S41 becomes clear). By pressing the button
”pile board on/off” (12S10) the guide rails retract
(12Y61).

Extending and retracting guide rails

Guide rail

Permissible start condition

12S10

Extending guide rail (12Y60)

Pile change or forming a rack

12S41 free and 12S10

Retracting guide rail (12Y61)

Sequence of extending and retracting guide rails

183
Delivery pile control Function

Removal of sample sheet


The removal of sample sheet is controlled by
12S11 means of the button ”sample sheet removal”
(12S11) on the delivery operation panel.

When the button is actuated, the automatic pile


height control is interrupted. The sheet catchers
extend (12Y13), for reason of better adhesion it is
possible to additionally activate suction air
(optional) (12Y62). The stop shaft swings up
(12Y11) and the sheet can be removed. Actuating
the button ”sample sheet removal” (12S11) again,
cancels the removal of sample sheet, the pile
executes the automatic pile height control.

When removing a sample sheet the locking of the


front edge sheet stop (12Y49) is deactivated if it
was activated beforehand.

Removal of sample sheet

Removal of sample sheet


Permissible start condition

12S11
– Extending sheet catcher (12Y13)
– Suction air on (12Y62) - optional
– Swinging up stop shaft (12Y11)

12S11
– Suction air off (12Y62) - optional
– Retracting sheet catcher (12Y13)
– Swinging back stop shaft (12Y11)

Sequence of sample sheet removal

184
Delivery pile control Function

Paper blockage
In case of a paper blockage, the paper supply is
Paper blockage blocked at the feeder. To trigger a paper blockage,
Permissible start condition
either main pile or auxiliary pile must meet one of
the following stop conditions.
Stop condition
Main pile:
Paper supply at feeder blocked
(Only if the delivery is not in non-stop operation)

Sequence of paper blockage – Switch ”pile down slow” (12S131) overshot


– Switch ”bottom main pile limitation” (12S34)
reached

Auxiliary pile:
– Switch ”bottom auxiliary pile limitation”
(12S56) reached
– Maximum paper height in non-stop operation
reached (depending on paper thickness
between 1500 and 4000 sheets)
The paper blockage is only cancelled after
elimination of the respective cause.

185
Delivery pile control 12M1 Main pile motor (Preset)

12M1 Main pile motor (Preset)

Place of installation

12M1

Place of installation of main pile motor (Preset)

Layout
 Motor electronics
 Motor and brake
 Gear unit
 Male connector

Layout of main pile motor (Preset)

186
Delivery pile control 12M1 Main pile motor (Preset)

Task and function


The main pile motor moves the main pile upwards
and downwards via the pile chains.

A brushless motor is used which can execute the


following functions:
– Speed control
– Changeover between two different speed
levels (”fast” and ”slow”)
– Electrical deceleration (controlled by the
corresponding power part)
– Stopping or emergency braking by means of
installed brakes

The motor is provided with the following internal


functions for the purpose of control and monitoring:
– Commutation and speed recording via Hall
signals
– Temperature recording via resistor

Technical specifications
– Output: 0.18/0.36 kW
– Power supply: DC 120 V
– Speed (gear unit): 5.7/40 min–1
– Ratio: 100:1
– Resistor code: 2 (560 W)

187
Delivery pile control 12M1 Main pile motor (Preset)

Pin assignment

Pin Function
A1 X1 motor line (slow)
A B C B1 Y1 motor line (slow)
1 1
C1 Z1 motor line (slow)
2 2
3 3 A2 X2 motor line (fast)
4 4 B2 Y2 motor line (fast)
5 5 C2 Z2 motor line (fast)
C5 Brake (reference potential DC)
B5 Brake (DC +24 V)
B4 Hall 1
A5 Hall 2
Pin assignment of main pile motor (Preset) B3 Hall 3
A4 Resistor code
A3 PTC (temperature monitoring)
C4 Auxiliary voltage motor electronics UH
C3 Ground auxiliary voltage
PE conductor

188
Delivery pile control 12M1 Main pile motor (standard)

12M1 Main pile motor (standard)

Place of installation

12M1

Place of installation of main pile motor (Standard)

Layout
 Motor electronics
 Motor and brake
 Gear unit
 Male connector

Layout of main pile motor (standard)

189
Delivery pile control 12M1 Main pile motor (standard)

Task and function


The main pile motor moves the main pile upwards
and downwards by means of the pile chains.

A three-phase induction motor is used which can


execute the following functions:
– Changeover between two different speed
levels (”fast” and ”slow”)
– Stopping and emergency braking by means
of the installed brake

The motor is provided with the following internal


functions for the purpose of controlling and
monitoring:
– Speed recording via Hall signals
– Temperature recording via resistor

Technical specifications
– Output: 0.13/0.42 kW
– Power supply: 220 V / 50 Hz
265 V / 60 Hz
– Speed (gear unit): 9.5/41.5 min–1 (220V)
11.5/49.7 min–1 (265V)
– Ratio: 66:1
– Resistor code: 2 (560 W)

190
Delivery pile control 12M1 Main pile motor (standard)

Pin assignment

Pin Function
A1 Winding U1 (slow)
B1 Winding V1 (slow)
A B C
1 C1 Winding W1 (slow)
2 A2 Winding U2 (fast)
3 B2 Winding V2 (fast)
4 C2 Winding W2 (fast)
5 A3 N1, N2
B5 Brake (reference potential DC)
C5 Brake (DC +24 V)
B4 Hall 1
Pin assignment of main pile motor (standard) A5 Hall 2
C3 Resistor code
B3 PTC (temperature monitoring)
C4 Auxiliary voltage of motor electronics UH
A4 Ground auxiliary voltage
PE conductor

191
Delivery pile control 12M2 Auxiliary pile motor

12M2 Auxiliary pile motor

Place of installation

12M2

Place of installation of auxiliary pile motor

Layout
 Gear unit
 Motor
 Motor electronics
 Circular connector

Layout of auxiliary pile motor

192
Delivery pile control 12M2 Auxiliary pile motor

Task and function


The auxiliary pile motor moves the auxiliary pile
upwards and downwards by means of the pile
chains.

A brushless motor is used which can execute the


following functions:
– Speed control
– Electric deceleration (controlled by the
corresponding power part)
– Deceleration through the self-locking gear
unit
The motor is provided with the following internal
functions for the purpose of controlling and
monitoring:
– Commutation and speed recording via Hall
signals

Technical specifications
– Output: 30 Watt
– Power supply: DC 48 V
– Speed (gear unit): 1 min–1
– Ratio: 2564:1
– Resistor code: 5 (5.6 kW)

193
Delivery pile control 12M2 Auxiliary pile motor

Pin assignment

Pin Function
1 X motor line
2 Y motor line
3 Z motor line
4 Hall C
6 Hall B
7 Auxiliary voltage of motor electronics UH
8 Hall A
9 Ground auxiliary voltage
11 Resistor code
12 –
Pin assignment auxiliary pile motor 13 –
14 –
PE conductor

194
Delivery pile control 12B65 Changeover fast/slow

12B65 Changeover fast/slow

Place of installation

12B65

Place of installation 12B65

Layout
 Sensor
 Cable

Sensor 12B65 with cable

195
Delivery pile control 12B65 Changeover fast/slow

Task and function

The ultrasonic sensor 12B65 monitors whether the


upper edge of the pile (paper, pallet or pile
support plate) is at the corresponding height.

The output signal is used to change the speed to


fast/slow.

Switching output: normally closed contact

Connection

Core colour Function Terminal

12B65 brown + 24V DC 12X2: +1

blue 24V DC 12X2: –1

black signal 12X2: 116

Cable end sensor 12B65

Removal and installation

The sensor 12B65 is fixed to the control lever by


means of two screws.

When installing the cable there must be enough


room for the rotary movement of the lever.

Removal and installation 12B65

196
Delivery pile control 12B65 Changeover fast/slow

Checking the circuit state


The output signal of the sensor 12B65 reaches
EAK_12 EAK_12, input E65 via the switch 12S117/switch-
E65 ing point 1 (at the control lever).
12B65 12S117/1

Signal flow

 Position signal E65

The input signal E65 can be checked on the


service display EAK:
0: The sensor 12B65 detects an object (the pile
is at the level of the sensor) or 12S117/
switching point 1 is actuated (the pile support
plate presses the control lever upwards)
1: The sensor 12B65 does not detect any object
(the pile is below the sensor) or
12S117/switching point 1 is not actuated (the
control lever is not actuated)
Service display, signal E65

197
Delivery pile control 12B69 Pile height control

12B69 Pile height control

Place of installation

12B69

Place of installation 12B69

Layout
 Sensor
 Cable

Sensor 12B69 with cable

198
Delivery pile control 12B69 Pile height control

Task and function

The capacitive sensor 12B69 monitors whether


the upper edge of the pile (paper) is level with the
sheet stop. Based on this sensor signal, the
control systems regulates the position of the
delivery pile.

Switching output: normally open contact

Connection

Core colour Function Terminal

12B69 brown + 24V DC 12X2: +1

blue 24V DC 12X2: –1

black signal 12X2: 69

Cable end sensor 12B69

Removal and installation


The sensor 12B69 is fixed to the support on the
sheet jogger shaft by means of a screw.

When installing the cable there must be enough


room for the rotary movement of the stop shaft
and for the adjustment of the sensor at the
support.
The cable must not be fixed to movable parts
(except for the sheet jogger shaft). These are in
particular the following points:
– Sheet catcher hose
– Non-stop frame

Removal and installation 12B69

199
Delivery pile control 12B69 Pile height control

Setting
In the normal position the sensor is fixed in the
bottom third of the oblong hole (see figure) and
the rack height is adjusted to 70 mm. Depending
on the condition of the pile or the printing material,
approx. 50 mm this position can be altered.

Note:
A repositioning of the sensor needs to be
considered in non-stop operation for the rack
height (adjustable on the control console)

Normal setting

Checking the circuit state


The output signal of the sensor 12B69 reaches
EAK_12 EAK_12, input 70 and the HAK control sections of
E70 the main and auxiliary pile drive (exact assignment
see block diagram).
HAK_01
12B69
HAK_02

Signal flow

 Position of signal E70

The input signal E70 can be checked on the


service display EAK:
0: The sensor detects no object (the pile is
below the sensor)
1: The sensor detects an object (the pile is
located at the level of the sensor)

Note:
The signal is also displayed as status signal on the
Service display, signal E70 service display of the two respective HAK control
sections.

200
Delivery pile control 12B129 Delivery upper edge of pile

12B129 Delivery upper edge of pile

Place of installation

12B129a

12B129

Place of installation 12B129 and 12B129a

Layout
 Sensor
 Cable
12B129

12B129a

Sensor 12B129 and 12B129a with cable

201
Delivery pile control 12B129 Delivery upper edge of pile

Task and function

The light barrier 12B129 monitors whether the


upper edge (paper, pallet or pile support plate) of
the main pile is located at the respective level
underneath the auxiliary pile. By means of this
sensor signal, the separation and merging of the
pile is controlled in non-stop operation with board.

The light barrier consists of a transmitter


(12B129a) and a receiver (12B129).

Switching output: dark switching

Connection

12B129

12B129 Core colour Function Terminal

brown + 24V DC 12X2: +1

blue 24V DC 12X2: –1

black signal FAM64:XA29


Cable end sensor 12B129

12B129a

12B129a Core colour Function Terminal

brown + 24V DC 12X2: +1

blue 24V DC 12X2: –1

Cable end sensor 12B129a

202
Delivery pile control 12B129 Delivery upper edge of pile

Removal and installation


Transmitter and receiver of the light barrier are
screwed down to the support (metal plate). Both
D.S. supports can be relocated in height through the
oblong holes. Both supports must be at the same
level.

When installing the cable there must be enough


12B129a room for the upward and downward movement of
the non-stop frame.

O.S. In its normal position, the light barrier should be


set as high as possible to prevent a lowering of
the pile below the rear edge stop.

12B129

Removal and installation 12B129

Checking the circuit state


The output signal of the sensor 12B129 (receiver)
EAK_12 reaches EAK_12, signal E77.
E77
12B129a 12B129

Signal flow

 Position of signal E77

The input signal E77 can be checked on the


service display EAK:
0: The light barrier is not interrupted
1: The light barrier is interrupted

Service display, signal E77

203
Delivery pile control 12S34 Bottom main pile limitation

12S34 Bottom main pile limitation

Place of installation

12S34

Place of installation 12S34

Task and function

The position switch 12S34 switches the main pile


drive off when the main pile has reached its
lowest position.

There is a pin on the pile chain which actuates the


position switch via a shifter mechanism.

Principle of operation: normally closed contact

204
Delivery pile control 12S34 Bottom main pile limitation

Setting

 Lower the pile support plate of the delivery


until the pile support plate rests on the floor
and the pile chains are relaxed.
 Slacken the fixing bolt  at the control plate
.
 Adjust the control plates so that the position
switch 12S34 is actuated in this position of
the delivery pile support plate.

Position switch 12S34

Mounting plate with (actuated) position switch

205
Delivery pile control 12S34 Bottom main pile limitation

Checking the circuit state


The output signal of the switch 12S34 reaches
EAK_12 EAK_12, input 34 via the switches 12S34a and
E34 12S34b (if available).
12S34 12S34a 12S34b

Signal flow

 Position of signal E34

The input signal E34 can be checked on the


service display EAK:
0: at least one switch is actuated
1: no switch is actuated

Service display, signal E34

206
Sheet alignment Block diagram

Sheet alignment

Block diagram

Double-sheet detector Sheet alignment control Pull lay control Double-sheet detector
SM74 / 52 SM102/CD102
D.S. O.S. D.S. O.S. D.S. O.S.
1B66 1B65 1B13 1B49 1B9 1B10 1B11

SUM1 SUM1
RL12 RL12 RL12 RL12 DBE

1AUM1

Automatic misalignment control Sheet stop finger Gripper opening


11M7 O.S D.S
. .
Automatic sheet arrival control 1Y15 1Y46 1Y16
SM102/CD102 = 11M3
M SM74 = 1M7

SSM1
M

SSM1

SSK EAK 1

IDS

Displays

SAK ESK
SVM MID11 MID12

REK1 REK2 DSK DNK ZID

Legend: Data line Control lines

Block diagram of sheet alignment

207
Sheet alignment Block diagram

The sheet alignment system consists of:


– the sheet alignment control BAK,
– the pull lay control ZMK,
– the double-sheet detector DBE,
– the automatic sheet arrival control BAR
(not on SM52),
– the automatic misalignment control
(only on SM102 with Preset and CD102).

As a result of mechanically controlled sequences of


motions, the sheet is aligned with the sheet alignment
system before it enters the first printing unit. At the
same time, the electronic control system:
– registers the point of time of sheet arrival,
– monitors sheet infeed,
– detects double-sheets.

From different sensors the electronic control system


receives information from the area of the front lays at
certain interrogation points.
The sensor signals are processed on the processor
board 2 (REK2). The REK2 shows the result of the
evaluation on the control console display ZID and the
press displays MID. Simultaneously, the electronic
control system activates various actuators (drives,
valves etc.) in the press.

208
Sheet alignment Block diagram

Degree values relevant to sheet alignment

The illustration opposite shows the different


interrogation points in the area of the front lays.
BAK The relation between the degree values and the
processes in the press is explained in more detail
ZMK on the next pages. To make the relation clear, the
illustration shows the operation points ”Feeder ON”
and ”Feeder OFF”.
DBE
Table of degree values:

SM52 SM74 SM102 CD 102


Feeder Feeder
ON OFF  230_ 285_ 192,0_1 170,0_1
222,0_ 200,0_
Interrogation points
 303_ 208,0_1 186,0_1
238,0_ 216,0_
 20_ 330_ 336,0_ 313,0_
40_
 330_ 15_ 311,0_ 289,0_
 42,5_ 72_ 3,0_ 341,5_

1 only for presses with Preset feeder

209
Sheet alignment 1B13/1B49 Sheet alignment control

1B13/1B49 Sheet alignment control

Block diagram

For correct sheet transfer from the feeder into the


BAK first printing unit, the sheet must be placed against
the front lays as follows:

FÜK
– SM52 between 240_  and 20_ ,
– SM74 between 285_  and 40_ ,
Front
lays
ANK Paper
– SM102 between 222_  and 336_ ,
1B13/1B49 – SM102 with Preset between 192_ 
Interrogation points and 336_ ,
– CD102 between 200_  and 313_ ,

Sheet alignment control – CD102 with Preset between 170_ 


D.S. O.S.
and 313_ .

1B13 1B49 The optimum sheet arrival of the electric  is as


follows:
– for SM74 at 303_,
RL12 RL12 – for SM102 at 238_,
– for SM102 with Preset at 208_,
– for CD102 at 216_.
– for CD102 with Preset at 186_.
1 LVT1 The following applies to the degrees listed (see block
1EVM4 Displays diagram):

MID12 MID11 – At  and paper run:


the ANK must not detect paper.

ZID – At  and paper run:


EAK 1 the ANK must detect paper.
– At  and paper run:
DNK to analyze the information provided by the pull
lay control (1B9/1B10) the ANK must detect
paper.
ESK SVM DSK
The sensors (1B13 and 1B49) of the sheet alignment
control register at which point of time the sheets
arrive at the front lays. Each sensor housing contains
an ANK and FÜK sensor.

REK2 ANK = sensor for sheet alignment control


FÜK = sensor for overshooting-sheet control

Legend: Data line Note:


Control lines Speedmaster SM52 is only equipped with one sensor
(1B49) of the sheet alignment control.
Block diagram of sheet alignment control

210
Sheet alignment 1B13/1B49 Sheet alignment control

The signals of the sensors are transmitted to the


amplifiers (RL12) where they are amplified.

The signals from the amplifiers reach the processor


board REK2 via
– the distribution box 1LVT1,
– the input/output distributor module EVM (only
SM52),
– the input/ output board EAK and
– the input/output control board ESK.
The REK2 analyzes the signals of the sheet
alignment control. The evaluated signals are required
for the following functions of the printing press:
– sheet alignment at the front lays,
– misaligned-sheet display (trend display),
– automatic sheet arrival control (servo-drive
11M3/1M7),
– automatic misalignment control (servo-drive
11M7).

The REK2 shows the result of the evaluation on the


control console display ZID and the press displays
MID.

Circuit states of the ANK and FÜK sensors in the


D.S. MID
 FÜK display
(sensor for overshooting control)

O.S.
 ANK display
(sensor for sheet alignment control)
Circuit states displayed on the MID
With the help of the MID on the control panel of the
feeder, the FÜK sensors  and ANK sensors  can
be adjusted and monitored. The MID reflects the
circuit state of the corresponding sensor on the drive
side and on the operator side.
Symbol lit = sensor detects paper
Symbol not lit = sensor does not detect paper

The FÜK and ANK displays are visible when the


switch ”Safe” on the control panel of the feeder is set
to ”Safe” and the printing speed is x 3500 i.p.h.

Note:
On Speedmaster SM52 the symbols of two sensors
are displayed, even though only one sensor if fitted.

211
Sheet alignment 1B13/1B49 Sheet alignment control

Sheet alignment errors detected by the ANK sensors

The ANK sensors detect:


BAK
– early sheets (first sheet),
SM52 240_
SM74 285_ – late sheets (missing sheets),
SM102 222_
SM102 with Preset 192_ Paper (first sheet) – misaligned sheets.
CD102 200_
CD102 with Preset 170_ An early sheet exists if the first sheet of the sheet
stream already covers the ANK sensor at press
angle .
The feeder and press stop immediately. The
sheets are held back on the feed table.

Early sheet

A late sheet exists if none of the ANK sensors


detects paper at press angle .
BAK
The feeder stops and the remaining sheets are held
SM52 20_
SM74 330_
back on the feed table. The sheets inside the press
SM102 336_ are printed and transported to the delivery. The
SM102 with Preset 336_ press speed is then reduced to 3 000 i.p.h.
CD102 313_
CD102 with Preset 313_

Late sheet

A misaligned sheet exists if only one of the ANK


BAK sensors – either on the drive side or on the operator
SM74 330_ side – detects paper at press angle .
SM102 336_ The feeder stops and the remaining sheets are held
SM102 with Preset 336_ back on the feed table. The sheets inside the press
CD102 313_
are printed and transported to the delivery. The press
CD102 with Preset 313_
speed is then reduced to 3 000 i.p.h.

O.S. Paper Paper D.S.


Note:
On SM52 misalignment control is not required.

Misaligned sheet

212
Sheet alignment 1B13/1B49 Sheet alignment control

Sheet alignment error detected by the FÜK sensors


The FÜK sensors detect:

BAK – overshooting sheets.


SM52 20_
SM74 330_ Given a continuous sheet flow, an overshooting sheet
SM102 336_ exists if one of the FÜK sensors detects paper at
Paper
SM102 with Preset 336_ press angle .
CD102 313_
The feeder and press stop immediately. The shingled
sheets remain on the feed table.

Note:
The press can be started again from the feeder even
if the FÜK sensor still detects the sheet of paper after
the fault message ”Overshooting sheet”. The press
stops as soon as the pushbutton ”Production run” or
the illuminated pushbutton ”Feeder ON” is pressed.
Overshooting sheet

Extended functions
The extended functions are only active with the
inductive double-sheet detector of SM52 and
SM74.

During paper transport:


The control system monitors the paper transport
on the feed table. For this purpose, the control
system needs the signal from the FÜK sensor
and the measuring result of the double-sheet
detector.

If during paper run the FÜK sensors do not


detect a sheet being fed in although the
double-sheet detector has registered a good
sheet (no double-sheet), the control system
switches the feeder off. There is probably a
paper jam on the feed table.

In the case of a double-sheet:


The control system stops the press immediately
(emergency stop) if the FÜK sensors detect
paper in the case of a double-sheet. Thus no
multiple sheets are fed into the press.

213
Sheet alignment 1B13/1B49 Sheet alignment control

Misaligned-sheet display (trend display)


During paper run or production run, the misaligned-
sheet display appears on the MID. This display
changes permanently and is a trend indication for
the operator. The misaligned-sheet display does
not intervene in press control.
The ANK sensors of the sheet alignment control
detect the misaligned sheet at the front lays. This
misalignment between the drive side (D.S.) and
operator side (O.S.) is determined and converted
Display of misaligned sheet. Drive side advanced. into a degree value.
The degree value is represented as a line symbol
on the MID (see ill.).
The display is only visible if no
Good sheet
Optimum sheet arrival – settings and adjustments,
– fault messages,
Misaligned sheet, D.S. advanced
Display of misalignment up to max. 18° – malfunctions
– or other information
Misaligned sheet, O.S. advanced
Display of misalignment up to max. 18° are indicated on the MID.

Note:
The fault message ”Misaligned sheet” and the
misaligned-sheet display are not identical.

214
Sheet alignment 1B13/1B49 Sheet alignment control

Place of installation

The sensors of the sheet alignment control are


located at the front lays.

1B13
1B49

Place of installation of sheet alignment control

Layout and task


The reflex sensors on the drive side and operator
Running direction of side of the sheet alignment system serve for paper
paper detection. Each reflex sensor has two optical
FÜK
ANK sensors – ANK and FÜK – monitoring the sheet
Amplifier alignment.
Reflex sensor
The FÜK and ANK sensors are fitted in a housing.
Viewed in the running direction of the paper, the
paper first covers the ANK sensor.
X2
ANK = sensor for sheet alignment control
FÜK = sensor for overshooting sheet control

In the amplifier of the reflex sensor, the sensor


signals are amplified and transmitted to the
X1
electronic control system. The amplifiers of the two
reflex sensors are located at the side frame on the
To 1LVT1
O.S., under the feed table.

Reflex sensor with amplifier

Pin assignment
ground
free free

+24K ANK–

FÜK+ FÜK–
ANK+

Pin assignment 1B49:X1/1B13:X1

215
Sheet alignment 1B13/1B49 Sheet alignment control

Removal and installation

1 2
1/2–1

– Position the press:


SM102: 100 ± 3 degrees – Loosen the fixing bolt on the brass block
CD102: 70 ± 3 degrees (1/2–1 rev.).

3 4

O.S. D.S.

– Pull off the reflex sensor with the brass – Remove the amplifier.
block towards the front.

216
Sheet alignment 1B13/1B49 Sheet alignment control

5 6

– Disconnect the cable leading to 1LVT1. – Remove the reflex sensor.

7 8

– Slide the new reflex sensor into the guide


of the holder.
Note:
To fix the reflex sensor in position, carefully
tighten the fixing bolt (tightening torque approx.
– Turn the handwheel anticlockwise until the
1 Nm).
end stop comes to rest on the cross bar.
– Tighten the fixing bolt.

217
Sheet alignment 1B13/1B49 Sheet alignment control

9 10

O.S. D.S.

– Connect the cable coming from 1LVT1 to – Fasten the amplifier.


the amplifier.

11 12
1.5 – 2.0 mm

– Push the reflex sensor and brass block on the – Tighten the fixing bolt on the brass block.
guide pins through to the stop.
– Check the distance (1.5 – 2.0 mm).

218
Sheet alignment 1B13/1B49 Sheet alignment control

Adjustment

1 2

3 2

ÁÁÁÁ

– Bring the bending in the ”0” position. – Press the pushbutton ”Forward” until the
sheet stop fingers are raised.

3 4

– Position the press: – Turn the handwheel anticlockwise until the


SM102: 333 ± 1 degree end stop comes to rest on the cross bar.
CD102: 310 ± 1 degree

219
Sheet alignment 1B13/1B49 Sheet alignment control

5 6

– Turn the handwheel back by one revo- – Place a sheet of paper of max. width
lution. (102cm) and approx. 20cm length against
the front lays.

7 8

MID MID

D.S. D.S.
O.S. O.S.

– Turn the adjusting screw until the ANK – Turn the adjusting screw until the ANK symbol
symbol on the MID just lights up. on the MID just lights up.
– Both ANK symbols on the MID must be lit.

220
Sheet alignment 1B13/1B49 Sheet alignment control

9 10

2 1/6

– Turn the handwheel clockwise for 1.3 mm – Both ANK symbols must be lit. The FÜK
+/–0.1 mm (2 1/6 revs), using the scale as a symbols must not be lit.
reference.

11

1.3 mm +/– 0.1 mm

FÜK Front lay

ANK
MID

10 mm D.S.
O.S.
Paper

– – Check the distance between the front lays


and ANK sensor.

221
Sheet alignment 1B13/1B49 Sheet alignment control

Checking the circuit state


1B13 in the service display of the EAK:
Input 13 = ANK (O.S.)
Input 15 = FÜK (O.S.)

1B49 in the service display of the EAK:


Input 49 = ANK (D.S.)
Input 51 = FÜK (D.S.)

1 = sensor detects paper


0 = sensor does not detect paper

Service display ”Present input/output, input/output


board EAK”

222
Sheet alignment 1B9/1B10 Pull lay control

1B9/1B10 Pull lay control

Block diagram
The pull lay control (ZMK) monitors the entire pull
procedure, i. e. the correct sheet infeed and the pull
ZMK end position.
SM52 330_ SM52 42.5_
SM74 15_ SM74 72_ The following applies to the degrees listed (see
SM102 311_ SM102 3_
CD102 289_ CD102 341.5_
block diagram):
At  and paper run:
1B9/1B10 Paper

the ZMK must not detect any paper.
– At  and paper run:
the ZMK and ANK must detect paper.
Interrogation points
– At  and no paper run:
the ZMK signal is not analyzed because the
sheet alignment control does not detect paper.
Pull lay control
D.S. O.S.
The reflex sensors on the drive and operator sides
serve for paper detection. Depending on the pull
1B9 1B10 direction only one of the two reflex sensors is
Audible signal
necessary for monitoring.
device 12 H 55 The pull direction is entered under the command
”Presetting”. Only the reflex sensor of the active pull
SUM1 SUM1
Audible signal lay is interrogated.
RL12 RL12
device 11 H 55
In the signal conversion modules SUM 1 the signals
of the reflex sensors are amplified. The circuit state
1 LVT 1 12 LVT 1 11 LVT 1 of each sensor is signalled by an LED on the
1EVM4 12EVM4 11EVM4
corresponding SUM 1
(LED is lit = reflex sensor detects paper).
EAK 1 EAK 12 EAK 11
SM52 only:
On SM52 the signals are amplified by the amplifiers
of the reflex sensors RL12.

Displays The electronic control system evaluates the signals


of the signal conversion modules.
MID12 MID11 ZID
The signals from the amplifiers reach the processor
board REK2 via
ESK SVM DNK – the distribution box 1LVT1,
– the input/output distributor module EVM
DSK (SM52 only),

REK2 – the input/ output board EAK,


– the input/ output control board ESK.
Legend:
Data line Control lines

Block diagram of pull lay control

223
Sheet alignment 1B9/1B10 Pull lay control

The REK2 analyzes the signals of the pull lay


control. In the case of a pull or sheet infeed error, it
passes the fault message to the control console
display ZID, the press displays MID and the audible
signal devices 11H55 and 12H55.

For an acoustic fault message to be output, the


function ”Audible signal device / pull lay control” must
be switched on in the central control console.

Circuit states of the ZMK sensors on the MID


D.S.
 Display of pull lay control
With the help of the MID on the control panel of the
feeder, the reflex sensors 1 B9 and 1 B10 can be
monitored.
O.S. The MID reflects the circuit state of the correspond-
ing sensor.
Circuit states displayed on the MID
Symbol lit = sensor detects paper
Symbol not lit = sensor does not detect paper

The circuit states of the reflex sensors are visible


when the switch ”Safe” on the control panel of the
feeder is set to ”Safe” and the printing speed is
x 3500 i.p.h.

When does a sheet infeed error/pull error exist?


A sheet infeed error exists if the sheet is already
ZMK
below the reflex sensor at the interrogation point.
SM52 330_
SM74 15_ The sensor detects paper.
SM102 311_
CD102 289_

Paper

Sheet infeed error

224
Sheet alignment 1B9/1B10 Pull lay control

A pull error exists if, at the interrogation point:


ZMK
SM52 42.5_ – the ANK sensors (1B13/1B49)
SM74 72_ detect the print sheet and
SM102 3_
CD102 341.5_ – the ZMK sensor does not detect
1B13/1B49 the print sheet.

1B9/1B10

Paper

Pull error

225
Sheet alignment 1B9/1B10 Pull lay control

Place of installation

The pull lays with the reflex sensors are fitted on


two cross bars in front of the transfer gripper
drum. One pull lay is fitted on the operator side
(1B10) and one on the drive side (1B9).

1B9
1B10

Place of installation of pull lays

 Signal conversion modules SUM1

Under the feed table, the two signal conver-


sion modules SUM1 are fitted on a support
bar. Each is allocated to one of the pull lays.

Place of installation of signal conversion modules

226
Sheet alignment 1B9/1B10 Pull lay control

Adjustment (Preset version)


The adjustment must be made:
– for the first start-up
– when changing the printing material (paper)
– in the case of frequent fault messages.

1 Enter the required sheet width in the


command mode ”Presetting”. After com-
mand enabling, the control system positions
the pull lay to the entered format.

2 Set the selector switch ”Safe” on the control


panel at the feeder to ”Safe”.
3 Press the illuminated pushbutton ”Feeder”,
so that the button is lit. Press the pushbut-
ton ”Forward” until the sheet stop fingers
are raised.

4 Press the pushbutton ”Forward” until the


pull lay stop is below the upper edge of the
sheet metal plate. The pull rail must not
have grabbed the sheet yet. The sheet can
still be moved.

5 Pull the sheet against the pull lay stop; the


paper must be under the reflex sensor .

6 Turn the knurled head screw  clockwise,


Adjustment of pull lays until the green LED at the corresponding
signal conversion module goes off.
a) Pull direction of sheet of paper
b) Running direction of paper 7 Turn the knurled head screw  anticlock-
wise, until the green LED just lights up.

c) Edge for format adjustment 8 Turn the knurled head screw  anticlock-
wise for another 10 notch positions
(= 0.3 mm; corresponds to approx. 1/4 rev.
of ).

9 Take out the sheet. The LED of the reflex


sensor goes off.

227
Sheet alignment 1B9/1B10 Pull lay control

 Adjust the spring pressure with the knurled


head screw . The pressure the pull roll
exerts on the printing material must be so
strong that each sheet is pulled reliably to
the pull lay stop. The locking nut 
prevents the pressure from changing once it
has been set.

 Reflex sensor
 Knurled head screw
 Knurled head screw
 Locking nut

Adjustment of pull lays

228
Sheet alignment 1B9/1B10 Pull lay control

Adjustment (standard version)

1 mm The adjustment must be made:


– for the first start-up
– when changing the printing material (paper)
a
– in the case of frequent fault messages.

1 Loosen the tommy bar screw  and


b position the pull lay so that it complies with
the sheet size at the feeder.

2 Move the magnet cover plate  with


recess until it is approx. 1mm away from
the pull lay stop .

Note:
The pull lay stop must not lie on the magnet
cover plate while the paper is being pulled.

3 Set the selector switch ”Safe” on the control


panel at the feeder to ”Safe”.

4 Press the illuminated pushbutton ”Feeder”,


+ - so that the button is lit. Press the pushbut-
c ton ”Forward” until the sheet stop fingers
are raised.

5 Press the pushbutton ”Forward” until the


pull lay stop is below the upper edge of the
Adjustment of pull lays sheet metal plate. The pull rail must not
have grabbed the sheet yet. The sheet can
a) Pull direction of sheet of paper still be moved.
b) Running direction of paper 6 Pull the sheet against the pull lay stop; the
paper must be under the reflex sensor .
c) Edge for format adjustment
7 Loosen the knurled head screw  a little
bit.

8 Turn the knurled head screw  clockwise,


until the green LED at the corresponding
signal conversion module goes off.

9 Turn the knurled head screw  anticlock-


wise, until the green LED just lights up.

ß Turn the knurled head screw  anticlock-


wise for another 14 notch positions
(= 0.4 mm; corresponds to approx. 1/4 rev.
of ).

229
Sheet alignment 1B9/1B10 Pull lay control

q Retighten the knurled head screw . The


LED of the corresponding reflex sensor
must still be lit.

w Take out the sheet. The LED of the reflex


sensor goes off.

e Adjust the spring pressure with the knurled


head screw . The pressure the pull roll
exerts on the printing material must be so
strong that each sheet is pulled reliably to
the pull lay stop. The locking nut
prevents the pressure from changing once it

ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ has been set.

Pull lay

Checking the sensing distance of


the reflex sensors
This check must be carried out:
– for the first start-up
– in the case of frequent fault messages.

The distance between the lower edge of the reflex


. sensor
and the surface of the magnet cover
plate  must be 4.5 – 5 mm. When fitting the reflex
sensor pay attention to this.

Sensing distance

 Tommy bar screw  Knurled head screw


 Magnet cover plate  Paper
 Pull lay stop  Knurled head screw
 Reflex sensor Locking nut
 Knurled head screw
Lower edge of reflex sensor

230
Sheet alignment 1B11 Double-sheet detector

1B11 Double-sheet detector

Block diagram
The double-sheet detector monitors sheet infeed at
Optical the feeder. It detects multiple sheets and irregulari-
sensor system ties in the sheet flow and thus prevents malfunc-
tions.
Transmitter
1āBā11āS An optical sensor system consisting of a transmitter
(1 B11 S) and a separate receiver (1 B11 E)
Receiver transmits light through the paper. The receiver
1āBā11āE supplies a signal. The amplitude of the signal
depends on the thickness and nature of the printing
material.

The control device DBE supplies the optical sensor


Control device system with operating voltage. Apart from this, the
DBE control device helps to process the sensor signal
and to adjust the double-sheet detector to the
printing material used.
1āLVTā1
Shortly before the sheet enters the first printing
Displays unit, the electronic control system checks the
amplitude of the signal supplied by the receiver.
MID12 MID11
Monitoring occurs at the following press angles:

EAK 1
ZID – 336 _ (SM102),
– 313_ (CD102).

DNK
If the light does not pass through the paper at this
point, there are two or more sheets.

The signal reaches the processor board REK2 via


ESK SVM DSK
– the distribution box 1 LVT1,
– the input / output board EAK,
– the input / output control board ESK.
REK2 The REK 2 analyzes the signals from the double-
sheet detector. If there is a double-sheet, REK 2
stops the feeder. The electronic control system
Legend: Data line reduces the press speed to 3 000 i.p.h. Simulta-
neously, REK 2 transmits a fault message to the
Control lines
control console display ZID and the press
Block diagram of double-sheet detector displays MID.

231
Sheet alignment 1B11 Double-sheet detector

Fault messages in the case of a double-sheet


Press display MID
The fault symbol # appears under the pictogram for
double-sheet.

MID after detection of a double-sheet

Control console display ZID


Selection
Selection of the display ”Entire press”
(production run display).

Symbol ”Double-sheet detector” The symbol ”Double-sheet detector” appears if the


sensor 1B65 or 1B66 detects a double-sheet.

Selection and symbol

Selection of the display ”Feeder / warning”


Selection

Symbol The symbol ”Electronic double-sheet detector”


”Electronic appears if the sensor 1B65 or 1B66 detects a
double-sheet detector” double-sheet.

Selection and symbol

232
Sheet alignment 1B11 Double-sheet detector

Place of installation

The control device of the double-sheet detector


is fitted near the signal conversion modules at
the sheet alignment system.

 Control device

Control device of double-sheet detector

The sensor is fitted on the press centreline in the


area of the front lays.

 Sensor of double-sheet detector

Sensor of double-sheet detector

233
Sheet alignment 1B11 Double-sheet detector

Layout

Components of double-sheet detector

 Control device of double-sheet detector  The LED lights up as soon as there are
DBE with operator’s controls two or more sheets.
 1 B11 S  Selector switch for adjustment of paper
Transmitter with connecting cable and thickness
fixing bracket
 1 B11 E
Receiver with connecting cable and
fastening element
 Cable to distribution box 1LVT1 at PU 1.
It comprises: Paper thick Control device off Paper thin
– the power supply for the control device
DBE (+ 24 V)
– the signal line from the control device DBE
to the electronics.
 Potentiometer for adjustment of sensitivity

234
Sheet alignment 1B11 Double-sheet detector

Connection and pin assignment

X1 1LVT1 at
PU1

Control device X2 1B11 Transmitter

X3
1B11 Receiver

Connection principle

Pin assignment of connector X1:

Contact no. on X 1 Function Core identification Terminal in LVT

1 Ground 24 V –1 X2: – 1
2 +24 V +1 X2: +
3 – – 1 –
4 Signal XE 11 FEM 64 XE 11
5 – – –

235
Sheet alignment 1B11 Double-sheet detector

Removal and installation


The transmitter and receiver are each screwed to
the fastening elements with one screw.

Each fastening element is held in place by two


screws.

The distance between transmitter and receiver


must be between 8 mm – 12 mm.

Note:
The upper edge of the receiver 1 B11 E must be
flush with the table edge.
The transmitter and receiver must be in perfect
alignment, i.e. arranged on the same centreline.

The control device is screwed to the fixing


bracket with 3 screws.

The fixing bracket is screwed to the press with


two screws.

Components of double-sheet detector

 Receiver – 1 B11 E
 Transmitter – 1 B11 S
 Fastening element for receiver
 Fastening element for transmitter
 Screws for fastening element
 Fixing bracket for control device
 Screws for fixing bracket

236
Sheet alignment 1B11 Double-sheet detector

Adjustment

The adjustment must be carried out:


Attention:
– each time the printing material changes,
– if printed sheets are printed on again.

Prerequisite for adjustment:


– press ready to run,
– paper run possible.

1 Check the distance between the transmitter and


receiver: required distance 8 – 12 mm. The
receiver does not jut out from the table edge.

2 Position the press to a press angle of 281 ± 1


degrees (CD102) or 304 ± 1 degrees (SM102)
and place a sheet of maximum width against
the front lays and pull lay stop.

3 Set the selector switch for paper thickness


0 to and turn the potentiometer
anticlockwise to the stop.
The LED is lit.

4 Turn the potentiometer slowly clockwise and


watch the LED :

if..

.. LED goes off: .. LED does not go off:

5 Continue turning the potentiometer clockwise 5 Set the selector switch 0 to


for another 10 scale marks. and turn the potentiometer anticlockwise to
the stop.
Continue with 8.
6 Turn the potentiometer clockwise until the
LED goes off.

7 Continue turning the potentiometer clockwise


for another 10 scale marks.

8 Check the functioning of the double-sheet


detector with a simulated double-sheet.

237
Sheet alignment 11M3 Automatic sheet arrival control

11M3 Automatic sheet arrival control


The automatic sheet arrival control influences the
possible sheet arrival transport of the sheets to the front lays. It regulates
the shingle stream in such a way that the individual
BAK sheets are positioned against the front lays at a
optimum certain press angle (see illustration). By means of a
sheet arrival servo-drive (11M3) the drive chain of the feeder is
adjusted. Thus the point of time of sheet arrival is
285_ 303_ 330_ SM74 controlled.
222_ 238_ 336_ SM102
192_ 208_ 336_ SM102 with Preset
200_ 216_ 313_ CD102
170_ 186_ 313_ CD102 with Preset

Point of time of sheet arrival

The ANK sensors (1B13/1B49) register when the


Sheet alignment control Displays sheets arrive at the front lays. On the basis of the
D.S. O.S. ANK signals the computer on the processor board
MID11 ZID
1B13 1B49 REK2 determines the point of time of sheet arrival.
If there is a deviation from the optimum sheet
MID12 DNK arrival, the shingle stream at the feeder must be
regulated. REK2 passes the new reference values
RL12 RL12 DSK for sheet arrival to the servo-drive control board
SSK. The SSK controls the servo-drive 11M3. If the
automatic sheet arrival control reaches the end of
its control range in the process, the symbol ”End of
positioning range” appears on the press displays
1LVT1
MID and on the control console display ZID
(production run display). The press control is not
affected by this.

EAK ESK SVM

SSK SAK REK2

1SSM1

11M3

Automatic sheet arrival control

Legend: Data lines


Control lines

Block diagram of automatic sheet arrival control

238
Sheet alignment 11M3 Automatic sheet arrival control

The symbol ”End of positioning range” will,


however, only disappear when the operator
repositions the servo-drive manually.
This can be done at the control console by means
of the ”Sheet arrival control” function.

”End of positioning range” displayed on the


press display MID

Activating and inactivating the automatic sheet arrival control

Selecting the automatic sheet arrival control

 Symbol ”Automatic sheet arrival control


on / off”
Inactivating and activating the automatic sheet
arrival control:
– in the preselection display,
– by means of the function button.

If the symbol is lit, the automatic sheet arrival


control is active.

Preselection/coarse display

Sheet arrival control


The sheet arrival control is automatically activated
when the operator switches off the automatic sheet
arrival control.

Symbol of the sheet arrival For the sheet arrival control the operator enters a
control in the ... fixed value.
The setting is made at the control console by means
actual value / coarse display of the right-hand +/–buttons.

Press model Setting range


Standard Preset
actual value / fine display version version
SM102 –2 to +18 –10 to +10
CD102 –10 to +10
SM74 –4 to +16

239
Sheet alignment 11M3 Automatic sheet arrival control

Graphical representation of sheet arrival


The graphical representation of sheet arrival is
only visible during paper run.

Selecting the fine display

Deviation from optimum sheet


arrival D.S.

Mean value of the two


deviations

Deviation from optimum sheet


arrival O.S.

Note:
The display is updated with a delay.
Actual value/fine display

The misaligned-sheet display on the MID gives the


operator information about sheet arrival.

Optimum sheet arrival

Sheet arrives at the front lays before


the optimum sheet arrival
Misaligned-sheet display Sheet arrives at the front lays after
the optimum sheet arrival

240
Sheet alignment 11M3 Automatic sheet arrival control
(standard version)

11M3 Automatic sheet arrival control (standard version)

Place of installation

ÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁ

Printing unit 1 and feeder

Technical data
Motor data
– U = DC 24 V
– P = 5 W

Potentiometer data
– U = DC 10 V
– R = 10 K

241
Sheet alignment 11M3 Automatic sheet arrival control
(standard version)

Interconnection diagram

X5
X10 SSR

SSR X10

X11 X12

SSR X11 X3 X4

X13 X14

11
Backplane of servo-drive
11 plug-in unit SSR

1SSM2: X1 11LVT1

1SSM2: X2
X1 X2
X3
1SSM2

Servo-drive distributor
module 1SSM2

3 4
11M3: X1
5

2 1

11M3

Servo-drive 11M3

     

+ Pin 1 X5: A1 X1: 1 X10: B2 Motor +
– Pin 2 X5: A2 X1: 2 X10: D2 Motor –
10V Pin 3 X5: A3 X3: 3 X11: 3 10V
Pin 4 X5: A4 X3: 4 X11: 4 Tap
0V Pin 5 X5: A5 X3: 5 X11: 5

242
Sheet alignment 11M3 Automatic sheet arrival control
(standard version)

Removal and installation

1 2

1
0 1

2
2

3 4
1

1
3

1 2

243
Sheet alignment 11M3 Automatic sheet arrival control
(standard version)

5 6

1 – 2 mm

7 8

1 3

2 1

22
5
4
0 1

244
Sheet alignment 11M3 Automatic sheet arrival control
(standard version)

9 10

11 12




245
Sheet alignment 11M3 Automatic sheet arrival control
(standard version)

13

Checking the operating range


 Servo-drive ”Automatic sheet arrival control”
11M3

Input Incremental value


+ 18 3134 " 4 inc
–2 963 " 4 inc

Service display ”Values, incremental values


servo-drives”

246
Sheet alignment 11M3 Automatic sheet arrival control
(Preset version)

11M3 Automatic sheet arrival control (Preset version)

Place of installation

11M3

Operator side

Technical data
Motor data
– U = DC 24 V
– P = 5 W

Potentiometer data
– U = DC 10 V
– R = 10 K

247
Sheet alignment 11M3 Automatic sheet arrival control
(Preset version)

Interconnection diagram

X5
X10 SSR

SSR X10

X11 X12

SSR X11 X3 X4

X13 X14

Backplane of servo-
11 drive plug-in unit SSR
11LVT1

1SSM1: X1
X3 X4

X2 1SSM1: X3

X1 X5
1SSM1

Servo-drive distributor
module 1SSM1

3 4
11M3: X1
5

2 1

11M3

Servo-drive 11M3

   


+ Pin 1 X5: A1 X1: 1 X10: B2
– Pin 2 X5: A2 X1: 2 X10: D2
10V Pin 3 X5: A3 X3: 3 X11: 3
Pin 4 X5: A4 X3: 4 X11: 4
0V Pin 5 X5: A5 X3: 5 X11: 5

248
Sheet alignment 11M3 Automatic sheet arrival control
(Preset version)

Removal and installation

1 2
2.0 mm
(approx. 1 rev.)
 

– Remove the servo-drive ”Automatic sheet – Turn the mechanism against the upper stop.
arrival control” 11M3. – Set the distance ( 2.0 mm ).

01 3891 ± 2

11M3: X1

– Fasten the servo-drive to the mounting plate.


– Insert plug 11M3: X1.
– Set to 3891"2 inc.

249
Sheet alignment 11M3 Automatic sheet arrival control
(Preset version)

– Install the servo-drive.

Checking the operating range


 Servo-drive ”Automatic sheet arrival control”
11M3

Input Incremental value


+ 10 205 " 4 inc
– 10 3891 " 4 inc

Service display ”Values, incremental values


servo-drives”

250
Sheet alignment 11M7 Automatic misalignment control

11M7 Automatic misalignment control

The automatic misalignment control influences the


Sheet alignment control Displays position of the sheets in such a way that they
D.S. O.S. arrive parallel to the front lays.
MID11 ZID
1B13 1B49
Automatic control is effected through:
MID12 DNK
– the servo-drive 11M7,
RL12 RL12 DSK – the guide rail (D.S.) of the forwarding suckers
at the suction head.
The misalignment is registered:
– by the ANK sensors on the D.S. and O.S.
1LVT1
The deviation between the registered values is an
indication of the misalignment of the sheets in
relation to the front lays (not to the feed table).
EAK ESK SVM
If the misalignment exceeds three degrees, the
automatic control compensates for the deviation.

The automatic misalignment control does not


intervene in press control.
SSK SAK REK2

1SSM1

11M7

Automatic misalignment control

Legend: Data lines


Control lines

Block diagram of automatic misalignment control

Position of guide rail D.S. at Position of sheet The graphical representation on the left shows the
suction head mechanical principle of the misalignment correc-
Front lays
tion.
O.S. D.S.

Principle of the misalignment correction

251
Sheet alignment 11M7 Automatic misalignment control

Activating and inactivating the automatic misalignment control

Selecting the automatic misalignment control

 Symbol ”Automatic misalignment control


on / off”
Inactivating and activating the automatic misalignĆ
ment control:
– in the preselection display,
– by means of the function button.

If the symbol is lit, the automatic misalignment


control is active.

  
    

Misalignment control
The misalignment control is automatically activated
when the operator switches off the automatic
misalignment control.

Symbol of the misalignment For the misalignment control the operator enters a
control in the ... fixed value.
The setting is made at the control console by means
actual value/coarse of the right-hand +/– buttons.
display Press model Setting range

actual value/fine display SM102 –10 to +10


CD102 –10 to +10

252
Sheet alignment 11M7 Automatic misalignment control

Graphical representation of sheet arrival

Selecting the fine display

The graphical representation of sheet arrival also


gives the operator information about the misalign-
ment of the sheets during paper run.

Deviation from optimum sheet


arrival D.S.

Mean value of the two


deviations

Deviation from optimum sheet


arrival O.S.
Actual value/fine display
Note:
The display is updated with a delay.

During paper run or production run, the misaligned-


sheet display appears in the MID.
This display changes permanently and is a trend
indication for the operator.

Good sheet
optimum sheet arrival
Misaligned sheet, D.S. advanced
Display of misalignment up to max. 18°
  
    Misaligned sheet, O.S. advanced
Display of misalignment up to max. 18°

253
Sheet alignment 11M7 Automatic misalignment control

Place of installation

11M7

Preset feeder

Technical data
Motor data
– U = DC 24 V
– P = 5 W

Potentiometer data
– U = DC 10 V
– R = 10 K

254
Sheet alignment 11M7 Automatic misalignment control

Interconnection diagram

X5
X10 SSR

SSR X10

X11 X12

X3 X4

X13 X14

SSR X13

Backplane of servo-
11 drive plug-in unit SSR
11LVT1

2SSM1: X1
X3 X4

X2 2SSM1: X3

X1 X5
2SSM1

Servo-drive distributor
module 2SSM1

11M7: X1 3 4
5

2 1

11M7

Servo-drive 11M7

    


+ Pin 1 X5: A1 X1: 1 X10: B10
– Pin 2 X5: A2 X1: 2 X10: D10
10V Pin 3 X5: A3 X3: 3 X13: 3
Pin 4 X5: A4 X3: 4 X13: 4
0V Pin 5 X5: A5 X3: 5 X13: 5

255
Sheet alignment 11M7 Automatic misalignment control

Removal and installation

1 2

O.S.

O.S. D.S.
D.S.

Guide rails

– Remove the servo-drive ”Automatic – Position the guide rails of the forwarding
misalignment control” 11M7. suckers parallel to each other.

4)

05 2048 ± 2

11M7: X1

– Insert plug 11M7: X1.


– Set to 2048 ±2 inc.

256
Sheet alignment 11M7 Automatic misalignment control

– Install the servo-drive.

Checking the operating range


 Servo-drive ”Automatic misalignment control”
11M7

Input Incremental value


–10 1434 " 2 inc
+10 2662 " 2 inc

Service display ”Values, incremental values


servo-drives”

257
Sheet alignment 11M7 Automatic misalignment control

258
Sheet monitoring 1...nB48/1...nB48a Sheet travel monitor

Sheet monitoring

1...nB48/1...nB48a Sheet travel monitor


The sheet travel monitor
Paper run – monitors the paper run,
Reflex sensor Paper Control switch – is fitted in each printing unit,
1...9B48 1...9B48a
– consists of:
the reflex sensor 1...9B48,
Segment the control switch 1...9B48a,
disk the segment disk for the control switch.

The reflex sensor detects the front edge of the paper


Impression
at the impression cylinder.
cylinder
LED
The control switch and the segment disk determine
the point of time of the interrogation.
The signals from the reflex sensor and control switch
Irregularity in paper run are combined in the reflex sensor and transmitted to
the control system.
No paper
Signals during paper run (see illustration):
– The segment disk is within the operating range
of control switch 1...9B48a.
– At the same time, the reflex sensor 1...9B48
LED detects the front edge of the paper.
– The LED on the reflex sensor 1...9B48 is lit.
– No signal to the control system.
1 LVT1
Displays Signals in the case of irregularities in the paper
MID12 MID11
run (see illustration):
ZID
EAK 1 – The segment disk is within the operating range
of control switch 1...9B48a.

DNK
– At the same time, the reflex sensor 1...9B48
does not detect paper.
– The LED on the reflex sensor 1...9B48
ESK SVM DSK is not lit.
– Signal to control system.
– REK2 intervenes in press control.
REK2

Legend: Data line

Control lines

Block diagram of sheet travel monitor

259
Sheet monitoring 1...nB48/1...nB48a Sheet travel monitor

The electronic control system analyzes the signals


from the reflex sensor as long as there is paper in
the press. Via the input/output board EAK of the
corresponding printing unit and the input/output
control board ESK the signals are transmitted to the
processor board REK2. In the case of a fault, REK2
intervenes in press control and triggers various
processes:
– press and feeder stop,
– dampening systems and inking units are
thrown off,
– impression throw-off,
– display of fault at printing unit, in press
displays MID and control console display ZID.

In the MID, the position code of the corresponding


printing unit appears under the fault symbol.

Fault display in MID

Fault display in In the ZID (production run display), the fault


production run display (ZID) symbol appears with the corresponding position
code.
Symbol ”Blanket control Simultaneously, the symbol ”Blanket control
detects paper” detects paper” appears in the fault display. The
(fault display in ZID) fault can be acknowledged and deleted by
pressing the button allocated to the symbol.

The fault is eliminated:


– after removing the sheet from the base or
– after removing the piece of sheet from the
blanket and
– after lifting the guard ”Plate cylinder”.
The electronic control system allows the press to
continue running.

260
Sheet monitoring 1...nB48/1...nB48a Sheet travel monitor

Service display
To check the input 48, select the service display
”Present input/output” (e.g. EAK2_02) of the corre-
sponding printing unit.

Buttons to be pressed for this selection:

1) 2) 3) 4)

Circuit state of input 48:


1 = reflex sensor detects paper,
no signal to the control system.
Service display ”EAK2_02” of PU2
0 = reflex sensor does not detect paper,
signal to control system.

 Input 48 (sheet travel monitor 1...9B48)

261
Sheet monitoring 1...nB48/1...nB48a Sheet travel monitor

Place of installation

1...nB48 1...nB48a
(middle of press) (operator side)

Impression cylinder
in printing unit

Speedmaster CD –operator side–

262
Sheet monitoring 1...nB48/1...nB48a Sheet travel monitor

Components
Reflex sensor 1...nB48

Reflex sensor 1...nB48


detects does not
paper detect paper
ca. 24V
24V 0V 3 2

LED (LED lit) (LED not lit)


4 1
0V

Reflex sensor

Control switch 1...nB48a

Control switch

Adjustment

Adjustment of reflex sensor 1...nB48

1 4 + 7 9

Adjustment of control switch 1...nB48a

3 9

263
Sheet monitoring 1...nB48/1...nB48a Sheet travel monitor

1 2

1...nB48

70 ± 1 mm

– Remove reflex sensor 1...nB48. – Fit the reflex sensor and insert the plug.
– Set the distance (70 ± 1 mm) between the
reflex sensor and impression cylinder.

3 4
1.0_

LED

LED
LED

– Turn the impression cylinder in the direction – Turn the impression cylinder back by 1.0°
of printing (see arrow) so that the LED just (see arrow).
lights up (reflex sensor detects cylinder – The LED is not lit.
surface).

5 6

1...nB48a

1...nLVT1

– Remove control switch 1...nB48a. – Fit the control switch and connect it with the
– Withdraw the plug from 1...nB48. reflex sensor (see circuit diagram).

264
Sheet monitoring 1...nB48/1...nB48a Sheet travel monitor

7 8
1...nB48a
Segment disk

0.8 – 1.0 mm

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ = =

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
– ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
The segment disk must run in the middle of
the recess and must not contact the control
switch. – Select the service display ”Present input/
– Pay attention to both segments. output” of the corresponding printing unit.

9 Direction of printing

2)
1

1)
– Loosen the segment disk.
– Turn the segment disk in the direction of
printing until input 48 changes from ”1” to ”0”.
– Fasten the segment disk.
– Check the adjustment.

265
Sheet monitoring 1...nB48/1...nB48a Sheet travel monitor

266
Plate clamping device Autoplate

Plate clamping device

Autoplate

Method of functioning
The main components of Autoplate are:
– a modified plate cylinder with air supply and two
pneumatic bars to open the front and rear
clamping bars,
– a pressing bar which is brought into contact with
the plate cylinder by two cylinders,
– two position switches which monitor the position
of the pressing bar,
– four pneumatic valves which actuate the pneu-
matic bars, the two cylinders of the pressing bar
and the control air for the air supply.
For actuation of the cylinders an operating pressure
of approx. 6 bars is required. This pressure is
generated by the pneumatic system compressor E4
and is kept at a constant level by the maintenance
unit. The compressor is switched on after ”Main
switch on”.

 Air supply, connections:


S – ”Control air, air supply”
1 – ”Opening the rear clamping bar”
2 – ”Opening the front clamping bar”
1
2 S  Control panel

 Pressing bar

 Position switch ”Finger guard 2”:


n S 25 a – ”Monitoring the pressing bar D.S.”
n S 25 b – ”Monitoring the pressing bar O.S.”

 Pneumatic valves from top to bottom:


n Y7 – ”Pressing bar on / off”
n Y 61 – ”Control air, air supply”
n Y 62 – ”Opening the front clamping bar”
n Y 63 – ”Opening the rear clamping bar”
Note:
Before the rear or front clamping bar is opened,
control air must be admitted to the air supply facility
in the plate cylinder. For this purpose, the plate
cylinder must be at standstill; otherwise the gaskets
could become subject to abrasion. This, in turn,
could cause unintentional venting of the control line.
Then the rear and front clamping bars cannot be
Operator side of printing unit opened anymore.

267
Plate clamping device Autoplate

Fault display

Button sequence

 The pressing bar and / or the upper finger


protecting bar was actuated.
The following position switches can be actuated:
– ”Monitoring the pressing bar”
n S 25 a (drive side)
n S 25 b (operator side),
– Monitoring finger guard 2”
n S 25 (operator side).

Malfunctions in 2nd printing unit

268
Plate clamping device Autoplate

Block diagram

n Y7 n Y 61 n Y 62 n Y 63
E4

n S59 n S 25a /
n S4 n S17 n H59 n S 25b

EAK15 EAKn SEK

REK1 ESK Legend:

Parallel data line


DSK REK2
Serial data line
DNK SAK
Control line

ZID Pneumatic line


Electronic control system

Block diagram Autoplate

E4 – Pneumatic system compressor


n Y7 – Pneumatic valve
”Pressing bar on / off”
n Y61 – Pneumatic valve
”Control air, air supply”
n Y62 – Pneumatic valve
”Opening the front clamping bar”
n Y63 – Pneumatic valve
”Opening the rear clamping bar”
n S4 – Selector switch ”Safe”
n S17 – Pushbutton ”Position”
n S59 / n H59 – Illuminated pushbutton ”Plate clamping”
n S25 a / b – Position switch
”Monitoring the pressing bar D.S./O.S.”

269
Plate clamping device Autoplate

Sequence of functions
The indicated press angles are valid for printing
unit 1.
From unit to unit these values differ as follows:
Speedmaster SM 102 – 74.57_ ,
Speedmaster CD 102 – 197.28 _.

Condition:
The plate cylinder will only turn to the correct
position for plate clamping/unclamping, if the coarse
register is set to zero or if the coarse register
sensor n B53 has acquired the current press angle
(see also chapter ”Coarse register monitoring”).

Position- Unclamping the Plate Unclamp- Plate Clamping the


ing the rear edge removal ing / clamping insertion rear edge
plate of the plate the front edge of of the plate
cylinder the plate

Actuation of
operator’s controls:

0.3 s 0.3 s
”Opening the
rear clamping bar”
n Y63 actuated

2.0 s
0.3 s
”Opening the 1.0 s
front clamping bar”
n Y62 actuated

2.0 s 0.5 s 2.0 s 0.5 s Enabling


”Air supply main motor
Enabling Enabling
control air” main motor main motor
n Y61 actuated

0.5 s
1.8 s 0.5 s
”Pressing bar on / off”
n Y7 actuated

Press angle 264.8 _ 322.6 _ 297.5 _

270
Plate clamping device 1...nB53 ”Coarse register monitoring”

1...nB53 ”Coarse register monitoring”

Place of installation

The sensor ”Coarse register monitoring” B53 is


fitted in each printing unit.
B53 It is located behind the servo-drive of the
circumferential register where it is screwed to a
fixing angle.

Place of installation of sensor ”Coarse register


monitoring”

Layout/connection
 Sensor
 Locking nut
 Connecting cable

Core Function
brown DC 24V
blue ground 24V
black output signal

Layout of sensor ”Coarse register monitoring


1...nB53”

271
Plate clamping device 1...nB53 ”Coarse register monitoring”

Task/function
 Positioning bolt
 Sensor B53
The inductive sensor 1...nB53 registers the
manual coarse adjustment of the circumferential
register.
After each coarse adjustment of the circumferen-
tial register, the operator must turn the press at
crawl speed for at least one full revolution. Only
then can the sensor register the adjustment and
pass the corresponding adjustment value on to
the press control system.
While the press turns at crawl speed, the sensor
sees the positioning bolt rotating past it.
Sensor and positioning bolt The zero position of the plate cylinder serves as a
reference point for the sensor. If the sensor
detects a deviation from the reference point with
the help of the positioning pin, the value is passed
on to the press control system. The deviation
corresponds to the coarse adjustment of the
register. The press control system determines the
press angle on the basis of the adjustment value.
Thus exact positioning of the plate cylinder is
possible again (e.g. important for the function
”Autoplate”).
Note:
To ensure that the sensor recognizes the manual
coarse adjustment of the register, the press must
turn at crawl speed for min. 1 revolution after
every adjustment.

Removal and installation

 Positioning bolt
1.0 mm ± 0.5 mm  Sensor B53

The sensor must be installed in such a way that


there is a distance of 1 mm ± 0.5 mm between the
positioning bolt and the sensor.
Tighten the sensor with the locking nut and carry
out the ”Adjustment” (see next page).

Fitting the sensor 


    

 ”

272
Plate clamping device 1...nB53 ”Coarse register monitoring”

Adjustment
Note:
The adjustment is necessary after every:
– installation and removal of the sensor,
– exchange of the software,
– exchange of the processor boards REK 1 / 2 and
of the display control board DSK,
– basic initialization of REK 1 / 2 and DSK,
– first start-up.

1 Set the circumferential register on all printing


units manually to ”0”.
Insert the positioning bolt at 52 mm .
Also refer to the operating manual, chapter C
Printing unit, circumferential register ”Setting
to zero” .

2 Set the circumferential register to zero on


CPC 1-04 (precision setting).
Also refer to the operating manual for
CPC 1-04.

3 Set perfector presses to straight printing.

4 Turn the press at crawl speed.

5 Select the function ”Coarse register


adjustment value”  for each printing unit
at the control console (”Service display”,
”Printing unit”). The corresponding symbol
lights up.
The symbol cannot be deactivated anymore.
The operator guidance disappears.
The reference-point run starts.

6 After the zero position of the coarse register


has been detected by the sensor, the
function  becomes inactive.
The sensor has determined the zero position
and has passed it on to the press control
system.

273
Plate clamping device 1...nB53 ”Coarse register monitoring”

274
Washup devices Control by command ”Washup”

Washup devices

Control by command ”Washup”

Selection of functions

Command
”Washup”

Actual value Service


display display
Printing unit
selection

Printing unit
selection

The command
”Washup” can
be aborted any
time with the
button ”Delete”.

Only with
Input start-up
warning

Control by command ”Washup”

275
Washup devices Messages

Messages

Faults at print start and during printing

Messages

Press not ready to run Fault in the press. Washing cannot be carried out.
Note:
Terminate the command ”Washup” with the button
”Delete”.
To locate the fault select ”Entire press” and the fault
display.

Paper in the press On command initiation there is still paper in the


press. Washing can only be carried out when the
paper has been transported out of the printing units
into the delivery.

Dryer waiting time – Only applies to presses with UV dryer –


The blanket and inking rollers may only be washed
180 s after the last drying. If the command is
enabled earlier, the symbol will light up and the
remaining waiting time will be indicated. The washup
programme only starts after the waiting time.

276
Washup devices Messages

Not enough water Not enough water in the washup solution container
E9:
- Sensor B1 "Monitoring water" (blanket / inking
roller washup device).
Not enough washup solution Not enough washup solution in the washup
solution container E9:
- Sensor B54 "Monitoring washup solution,
blanket washup device".
- Sensor B55 "Monitoring washup solution,
inking roller washup device”.
Inking roller washup device In the displayed printing unit the ink blade is not
monitoring of ink blade fitted. The sensor nB43 is not damped.

277
Washup devices Service display ”Washup”

Service display ”Washup”

Functions of the blanket washup device GTW


Button sequence

With the help of the ”Service display”, spray


procedures with water and washup solution can be
initiated. Apart from this, the washup blades can be
thrown on/off.
All functions can be activated during standstill of the
press or during ”Run”. The functions can be
activated either printing unit by printing unit or for all
units simultaneously. The corresponding solenoid
valves are then actuated in the printing units.

Functions of the washup devices

Spraying with water Solenoid valve 1...nY54 actuated.

Spraying with washup solution Solenoid valves 1...nY52 and 1...nY55 actuated.

Washup blade on/off Solenoid valve 1...nY53 actuated.

Functions of the impression cylinder washup device DZW

Spraying with water Solenoid valve 1...nY43 actuated.


The washup brush motors M43, M50...M56 start up.

Spraying with washup solution Solenoid valve 1...nY42 actuated.


The washup brush motors M43, M50...M56 start up.

278
Washup devices Service display ”Washup”

Functions of the inking roller washup device FWW


Button sequence

With the help of the ”Service display”, spray


procedures with water and washup solution can be
initiated. Apart from this, the ink blades can be
thrown on/off.
All functions can be activated during standstill of the
press or during ”Run”. The functions can be
activated either printing unit by printing unit or for all
units simultaneously. The corresponding solenoid
valves are then actuated in the printing units.

Functions of the washup devices

Spraying with water Solenoid valve 1...nY44 actuated.

Spraying with washup solution Solenoid valve 1...nY50 actuated.

Ink blade on/off Solenoid valve 1...nY51 actuated.

279
Washup devices Service display ”Washup”

Selecting the washup solution


Button sequence

If you press the button ”Entire press” in the ”Service


display”, you can choose between washing with
mineral oil-based and vegetable oil-based washup
solution. After a change, the parameters will be reset
to default values.

Choosing between mineral oil-based and vegetable


oil-based washup solution

Selectable functions Mineral oil-based solution Vegetable oil-based solution

Washing the blanket

Washing the inking rollers

Washing the impression cylinder

280
Washup devices Blanket washup device (GTW)

Blanket washup device (GTW)

Block diagram

1...nY54 1...nY52 1...nY55 1...nY53 1...nY56

E4

E9

EAK

Parallel data line


Serial data line
DSK REK2 ESK Control line
Washup solution or
water conduit
DNK2
Pneumatic line

ZID

Block diagram ”Washing the blanket”

E4 Pneumatic system compressor Y55 Blanket, washup brush


E9 Washup solution container Y56 Blanket, driving clutch
Y52 Blanket, washup solution
Y53 Blanket, washup blade
Y54 Blanket, water

281
Washup devices Blanket washup device (GTW)

Layout
 Blanket cylinder
 Rubber roller
 Rider roller
 Drop tubes for water and washup solution
 Wiper roller
 Washup blade
 Ink trough
 Spray tube for washup solution, washup brush
Washup brush


    

Function
When the command has been enabled and the
washup speed reached (5 000 i.p.h.), the drive of
the washup brush is engaged by the solenoid valve
nY56. The washup brush then turns at washup
speed. The wiper roller and washup brush are
driven.
When the washup brush has been engaged and
the 1st spray procedure has occurred, the washup
device is brought in the position for washup (nY53),
i.e. thrown on the blanket cylinder.
First spraying with washup solution occurs. The
solution is sprayed onto the blanket cylinder in two
different ways: via the drop tube (nY52), rider roller
and rubber roller and via the washup solution spray
tube for the washup brush and the washup brush
(nY55).

282
Washup devices Blanket washup device (GTW)

After the spray procedures with washup solution


spraying with water occurs (nY54).
The blade is in permanent contact with the wiper
roller. The ink removed by the blade is collected in
the ink trough and passed to a reservoir from there.
Such a reservoir is provided on the drive side of
each printing unit.
After washing of the blanket, the press stays in
operation (3000 i.p.h.).

283
Washup devices Blanket washup device (GTW)

Setting the number of cylinder revolutions and spray procedures for water and
washup solution
Button sequence

The first actuation of the function button allocates


the corresponding device to the right-hand and
left-hand +/– buttons.
After the allocation, the parameters can be changed
with the +/– buttons.
Pressing the function button again inactivates the
device again.

Blanket washup device selected

Changeover between settings for water (top) and


for washup solution (bottom) with the 1st function
button (above the left-hand +/– buttons).

Enter the number of cylinder revolutions with the


left-hand + / – buttons.
– water from 0 to 50
– washup solution from 0 to 150.

Enter the number of spray procedures with the


right-hand +/– buttons.
The setting range for the spray procedures goes
from 10% to 100%.
– 10% = 1 spray procedure.
– 100% = 10 spray procedures.

284
Washup devices Blanket washup device (GTW)

Example
Setting for water:
10 ¢ 10 cylinder revolutions
30% ¢ 3 spray procedures

Setting for washup solution:


40 ¢ 40 cylinder revolutions
30% ¢ 3 spray procedures

Flow chart:
”Washing with washup solution and water”

1.2 s
Water (nY54)
0.7 s (0.3 s if vegetableĆbased)

Washup solution (nY52)


0.3 s
Blanket
washup brush (nY55)

Blanket
driving clutch (nY6)

Blanket
washup blade (nY53)
Revolutions 0 4 40 99 104
102

Flow chart: ”Washing with washup solution and water”

285
Washup devices Inking roller washup device (FWW)

Inking roller washup device (FWW)

Block diagram

1...nY44 1...nY50 1...nY9 1...nY10 1...nY11 1...nY51

E4

E9

EAK
Parallel data line
Serial data line
DSK REK2 ESK Control line
Washup solution or
water conduit
DNK2
Pneumatic line

ZID

Block diagram ”Washing the inking rollers”

E4 Pneumatic system compressor Y44 Inking rollers, water


E9 Washup solution container Y50 Inking rollers, washup solution
Y9 Inking form rollers Y51 Ink blade
Y10 Ink ductor
Y11 Dampening rollers

286
Washup devices Inking roller washup device (FWW)

Layout
 Ink fountain roller
 Ink ductor
 Drop tubes for water and washup solution
 Dampening roller
 Plate cylinder
 Inking form roller
 Distributor cylinder
 Ink blade with rubber strip and ink fountain

ÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂ

     

Function
When the command has been enabled and the
washup speed reached (5 000 i.p.h.), washup
solution is sprayed onto the inking rollers. For this
purpose, the valve nY50 ”Inking rollers washup
solution” is actuated.
Then the ink ductor is thrown on (nY10).
After 40 cylinder revolutions and two spray
procedures, the ink blade is thrown on ( nY51).
The preselected spray procedures / cylinder
revolutions are carried out.
After the last spray procedure, the ink ductor is
thrown off. Simultaneously, the inking form rollers
(nY9) are brought into contact with the plate
cylinder.
When the inking form rollers are thrown off again,
the plate cylinder is predampened during 20
revolutions, nY11 actuated.
The press stops when washing is completed.

287
Washup devices Inking roller washup device (FWW)

Setting the number of cylinder revolutions and spray procedures for water
and washup solution
Button sequence

The first actuation of the function button allocates


the corresponding device to the right-hand and
left-hand +/– buttons.
After the allocation the parameters can be changed
with the +/– buttons.
Pressing the function button again inactivates the
device again.


       

Changeover between settings for water (top) and


for washup solution (bottom) with the 1st function
button (above the left-hand +/– buttons).

Enter the number of cylinder revolutions with the


left-hand + / – buttons.
Water: 0 ... 500
Washup solution: 150 ... 1000; if the ink fountain
roller is washed in addition: 225 ... 1500.

Enter the number of spray procedures with the


right-hand + / – buttons.
Setting possible from 0% ... 100%.

Setting 1 spray procedure every ...

100% 16
90% 20
80% 24 revolutions
70% 28
60% 32
50% 36
L L
0% 56

The first spray procedure lasts 0.8 s, the others 0.4 s.

288
Washup devices Inking roller washup device (FWW)

Additional washing of printing plate and ink fountain roller


Additional washing of Condition:
printing plate Before selecting the function ”Additional washing of
ink fountain roller”, remove the ink from the ink
Additional washing of ink fountain and carry out an ink shut-off at CPC 1-04.
fountain roller The printing plate and ink fountain roller can be
washed in addition via the inking roller washup
device. The inputs are valid for the selected printing
units.

Example
Setting for water:
50 ¢ 50 cylinder revolutions
70% ¢ one spray procedure every
28 revolutions

Setting for washup solution:


225 ¢ 225 cylinder revolutions
70% ¢ one spray procedure every
28 revolutions

289
Washup devices Inking roller washup device (FWW)

Flow chart:
”Washing with mineral oil-based washup solution without water”
If printing plate is
washed as well

Dampening rollers
(n Y11)

Inking form
80% of preselected cylinder
rollers (n Y9) revolutions if printing plate is
washed as well
Ink ductor (n Y10)

Ink blade 66% of preselected cylinder revolutions if


printing plate is washed as well
(n Y51)

Water (nY44)

Washup solution 0.4 s 0.2 s 0.2 s


(n Y50)

Revolutions 20 20 x x x 40 30 20
Preset spray procedures washup solution

Preselected cylinder revolutions washup solution

Flow chart: ”Washing with mineral oil-based washup solution without water”

Flow chart:
”Washing with mineral oil-based washup solution and water”
Dampening rollers
(n Y11)

Inking form
rollers (n Y9) as 1st section
above (with-
Ink ductor (n Y10) out water)

Ink blade
(n Y51)

Water (nY44) 0.4 s 0.4 s

Washup solution 0.2 s


(n Y50)

Revolutions x1 x2 x2 40 30 20
Preset spray proce- Preset spray procedures water
dures washup solution

Preselected cylinder revolutions Preselected cylinder revolutions


washup solution water

Flow chart: ”Washing with mineral oil-based washup solution and water”

290
Washup devices Inking roller washup device (FWW)

Flow chart:
”Washing with vegetable oil-based washup solution and water”

If printing plate is
washed as well

Dampening rollers
(nāYā11)

Inking form
rollers (nāYā9) 80% of preselected cylinder
revolutions if printing plate is
washed as well
Ink ductor (nāYā10)

Ink blade 66% of preselected cylinder revolutions if


printing plate is washed as well
(nāYā51)

Water (nY44) 8
0.4 s 0.4 s

Washup solution 0.4 s 0.2 s 0.2 s

(nāYā50)

Revolutions 80 30 20
x1 x1 x1 x1 x2 x2
Preset spray procedures Preset spray procedures
washup solution water

Preselected
cylinder revolutions
Preselected cylinder revolutions washup solution water

Flow chart: ”Washing with vegetable oil-based washup solution and water”

291
Washup devices Impression cylinder washup device (DZW)

Impression cylinder washup device (DZW)

Block diagram

1...nY43 1...nY42 1...nY41 M M50 ... M56, M43

E4

E9

EAK
Parallel data line
Serial data line

DSK REK2 ESK Control line


Washup solution or
water conduit
DNK2 Pneumatic line

ZID

Block diagram ”Washing the impression cylinder”

E4 Pneumatic system compressor 1...nY41 Impression cylinder, washup brush


E9 Washup solution container 1...nY42 Impression cylinder, washup solution
M50 ... M56, M43 Washup brush motors 1...nY43 Impression cylinder, water

292
Washup devices Impression cylinder washup device (DZW)

Layout
 Impression cylinder
 Spray tube for water
 Washup brush motor
 Washing trough
 Spray tube for washup solution
 Blade
 Washup brush

Impression cylinder washup device

Function
Each printing unit has a washup brush which is
connected with the washup brush motor via gears.
The motor is located in the middle of the printing
unit, under the impression cylinder.
When the command has been enabled and the
washup speed of 5000 i.p.h. has been reached, the
following functions are initiated:
– starting up the washup brush motors
M50 ... M56, M43
– throwing on the washup brushes (1...nY41)
– opening the spray tubes for washup solution
(1...nY42)
– opening the spray tubes for water (1...nY43).

The washup solution and water for the impression


cylinder washup device come from the washup
solution container E9 which also supplies the
blanket washup device.
After washing, the press stays in operation
(3000 i.p.h.).

293
Washup devices Impression cylinder washup device (DZW)

Setting the number of cylinder revolutions and the spray duration for water
and washup solution
Button sequence

The first actuation of the function button allocates


the corresponding device to the right-hand and
left-hand +/– buttons.
After the allocation the parameters can be changed
with the +/– buttons.
Pressing the function button again inactivates the
device again.

Impression cylinder washup device selected

Changeover between settings for water (top) and


for washup solution (bottom) with the 1st function
button (above the left-hand +/– buttons).

Enter the number of cylinder revolutions for water


and washup solution with the left-hand +/– buttons:
– Water: 0 and 30
– Washup solution: 0, 50 and 100

Enter the spray duration for water and washup


solution with the right-hand +/– buttons:
Setting range from 0 to 100%. Dependent on the
setting, the basic pulse duration for washup solution
and water is shortened or lengthened.

Setting Change in basic pulse duration

0% – 0.5 s
10% – 0.4 s
L L
50% 0
L L
90% + 0.4 s
100% + 0.5 s

294
Washup devices Impression cylinder washup device (DZW)

Example
Setting for water:
0 ¢ 0 cylinder revolutions
50% ¢ basic spray duration +/– 0 s

Setting for washup solution:


50 ¢ 50 cylinder revolutions
50% ¢ spray duration 0 s

Flow chart:
”Washing with washup solution and water”

Washup brush motor


(M43, M50...M56)

Impression cylinder
washup brush
2.0 s+/–x
(n Y41) 3.0 s+/–x 1.0 s+/–x
Spray duration

Water (nY43)
2.0 s+/–x 0.7s+/–x 0.7 s+/–x 0.5 s+/–x 1,0 s
Washup solution 0.5 s
(n Y42)
25 25 25 25 15 15 30
Revolutions Preselected
Preselected cylinder revolutions cylinder revolutions
washup solution water

Flow chart: ”Washing with washup solution and water”

295
Washup devices M43, M50...M56 Washup brush motors

M43, M50 ... M56 Washup brush motors

Place of installation
The washup brush motors are located in the middle
of each printing unit, below the impression cylinder.
They are accessible through the lower opening in
the side frame on the O.S.

These washup brush motors are only available


for CD102.

Washup brush motor in printing unit

Pin assignment

Pin Function

A2 AC 400 / 480 V phase U

A B C B3 AC 400 / 480 V phase V


1
C2 AC 400 / 480 V phase W
2
PE conductor
3
4
5

Plugs M43-X1, M50-X1 ... M56-X1

296
Washup devices E9 Washup solution container

E9 Washup solution container

Block diagram
 Pressure reducer with check valve

15K4M
 Safety valve
15K4M Contactor, pneumatic system compressor
M4 Pneumatic system compressor
B1 Sensor ”Monitoring water”.
M4
B54 Sensor ”Monitoring washup solution,
blanket washup device”
B55 Sensor ”Monitoring washup solution,
inking roller washup device”
E9 Washup solution container
E9
F70 F70 Pressure switch

B1 B54 B55

EAK

ESK

REK

Pneumatic line
Control line
Parallel data line

Block diagram: washup solution container E9

297
Washup devices E9 Washup solution container

Warnings
Symbols appear in the following displays if there are
malfunctions in connection with the washup solution
container:
– production run display,
– display which appears after initiating the
command ”Washup”,
– fault display ”Entire press/warning”.

Not enough washup solution Not enough washup solution in the washup solution
container E9.
Sensor B54 ”Monitoring washup solution, blanket
washup device”.
Sensor B55 ”Monitoring washup solution, inking roller
washup device”.

Not enough water Not enough water in the washup solution


container E9.
Sensor B1 ”Monitoring water”.

Insufficient pressure in the At an air pressure x 0.48 bars, pressure switch F 70


container responds.
In the control console display ZID both symbols
appear: ”Not enough washup solution” and ”Not
enough water”.

298
Washup devices E9 Washup solution container

Place of installation

Place of installation of washup solution container E9

 Washup solution container E9

The washup solution container is located under


the footboard on the O.S. (on presses with up to
5 units at the 2nd unit, with 6 units at the 3rd unit;
with 7 or more units one container at the 2nd unit
and one at the 6th unit).

Layout

Attention: Only refill the washup solution container


with the press switched off or the air supply
shut off (stop-cock closed).

 Refill opening with cover and sieve


 Pressure regulator with manometer
 Three-way stop-cock
 Solenoid valve
 Check valve
 Pressure switch F70
 Safety valve
 Sensor B55 ”Monitoring washup solution,
inking roller washup device”
Sensor B1 ”Monitoring water”
Sensor B54 ”Monitoring washup solution,
blanket washup device”

Terminal box with terminal strip E9-X1

Washup solution container E9

299
Washup devices E9 Washup solution container

Task
The washup solution container E9 supplies:
– the blanket washup device with water and
washup solution,
– the inking roller washup device with water
and washup solution.
In order to deliver water and washup solution, the
pressure in the container must be between
0.48 bars and 1.0 bar.
The pressure reducer reduces the air pressure
from the pneumatic system compressor M4 to
0.5 bars. If the pressure drops below 0.48 bars,
the pressure switch F70 responds. A warning
appears in the control console display ZID. If the
air pressure rises above 1.0 bar, the safety valve
opens.
The sensors B1, B54 and B55 monitor the liquid
levels.
If the levels drop below the min. permissible
values, a warning appears in the control console
display ZID. The initiated washup procedure is
completed, but a new washup procedure cannot
be started anymore.

Pin assignment E9-X1

Pin Function

3 4 1 DC 24 V
2  24 V
5 3 ”Monitoring water”
2 1 4 ”Monitoring washup solution,
blanket washup device”
5 ”Monitoring washup solution,
inking roller washup device”

Plug E9-X1

300
Washup devices B1, B54, B55 Sensors at the washup
solution container

B1, B54, B55 Sensors at the washup solution container

Place of installation
 B1 Monitoring water
 B54 Monitoring washup solution,
blanket washup device
 B55 Monitoring washup solution,
inking roller washup device

Sensors at washup solution container

Connection
Input at EAK :
0 ¢ level too low
1 ¢ level OK

Pin assignment

Marking Colour Function

X1 white signal

+1 brown DC +24 V

301
Washup devices B1, B54, B55 Sensors at the washup
solution container

Removal and installation


 Float
 Sensor
 Width across flats 27 with marking

All three sensors are of identical design. For


removal loosen the thread and unscrew the sensor.
For installation introduce the sensor into the
threaded hole, position the thread carefully and
screw it in. The sensor is sealed up by the tapered
thread and the Teflon sealing tape around it.
Tighten the sensor with 5 Nm.

Sensor at the washup solution container

Adjustment
The mounting position of the sensor determines its
switching function. Pay attention to the arrow on the
flat face of the screw.

Direction of arrow Function Symbol

upward ° NC contact

downward ± NO contact

Mounting position of sensor

302
Washup devices 1...nB43 Monitoring the ink blade

1...nB43 Monitoring the ink blade

Place of installation
The inductive sensor is located on the inside of
the side frame on the O.S. It is fitted in each
printing unit at the paper outlet.

Sensor ”Monitoring the ink blade”

Layout
 Sensor
 Nut and locking nut
 Connecting cable

Sensor ”Monitoring the ink blade” with nut and


locking nut

303
Washup devices 1...nB43 Monitoring the ink blade

Task
The inductive sensor ”Monitoring the ink blade
1...nB43 monitors the correct installation of the ink
blade. When the ink blade is not fitted, automatic
washing of the inking rollers is not possible.

Connection

Core Function

brown DC 24 V
blue ă 24 V
black signal

Pin assignment
Input 43 of EAKn:
(n = corresponding printing unit)

0¢ ink blade not fitted


1¢ ink blade fitted

Removal and installation


 Blade
 Sensor

4.0 mm  Nut/locking nut


 Side frame

When fitting the sensor, screw it so far in the


holder that the distance between ink blade and
sensor is 4.0 mm. Tighten the nut and locking nut.

Installation of sensor Monitoring the ink blade”

304
Inking unit Servo-drive ink fountain roller

Inking unit

Servo-drive ink fountain roller

Place of installation

The servo-drives for the ink fountain rollers  are


located on the operator side of the printing units.

D.S.

O.S.

Place of installation of servo-drive for ink fountain


roller O.S.

Layout and task


The servo-drive for the ink fountain roller is a
dc motor with brushes and potentiometer for
position feedback.

It is used for adjustment of the ink fountain


roller stroke. Thus the ink stripe width can be
influenced.

Servo-drive ink fountain roller

305
Inking unit Servo-drive ink fountain roller

Technical data
Motor data

U = DC 12 V

Potentiometer data

U = DC 10 V
R = 10 k

Terminal assignment

Terminal Function
black 6 6 black 6 6 black
1
yellow
5 5 yellow
5 5 blue DC 12 V (motor)
beige beige red 2
4 4 4 4
yellow/green
3 3 yellow/green
3 3 4 DC 10 V (potentiometer)
brown brown black
blue
2 2
blue
2 2 5  potentiometer
1 1 1 1 red
6 Potentiometer tap

Terminal strip of servo-drive for ink fountain


roller

306
Inking unit Servo-drive ink fountain roller

Removal and installation

Attention: Small parts can fall into the press during


disassembly!

 Nut on servomotor
O.S.  Gear wheel

 Locking screw

 Anti-rotation element

 Retaining nut

1 Zero position of ink fountain roller


Turn the threaded rod  against the left stop
with the nut  .
2 Disconnect the potentiometer from the
terminal strip.
3 Loosen the locking screw  and take out the
potentiometer.
4 Attach the anti-rotation element  to the new
potentiometer.
5 Connect the new potentiometer and turn until
Ink fountain roller O.S. the display on the central control console
indicates 0,00.
6 Install in reverse sequence.
7 If you want to make a precision correction,
loosen the retaining nut .
Correct the value by slightly turning the
potentiometer.
8 Check the value displayed on the central
control console.

307
Inking unit Servo-drive diagonal register 1...nM6

Servo-drive diagonal register 1...nM6

Place of installation

The servo-drives for the diagonal register  are


located on the operator side of the printing units.

D.S.

O.S.

Place of installation of servo-drive for diagonal


register O.S.

Layout and task


The servo-drive for the diagonal register is a dc
motor with brushes and potentiometer for position
Speedmaster SM 102
feedback.

It is used for cocking the plate cylinder.

Speedmaster CD 102

Servo-drive diagonal register on SM 102 and CD 102

308
Inking unit Servo-drive diagonal register 1...nM6

Technical data
Motor data

U = DC 24 V

Potentiometer data

U = DC 10 V
R= 10 k

Pin assignment

Pin Function
1
1
2 DC 24 V (motor)
3 4 2
5
3 3 DC 10 V (potentiometer)
2 1 4 Potentiometer tap
4 5  potentiometer
5

Plug of servo-drive of diagonal register

309
Inking unit Servo-drive diagonal register 1...nM6

Removal and installation

Attention: Small parts can fall into the press during


disassembly!

 Plug 1...nM6-X1

 Fixing bolts

 Hexagon nut

 Block

 Upper stop of eccentric sleeve

 Eccentric bolt

 Servo-drive

1 Withdraw the plug  from the servo-drive .


2 Remove the servo-drive by loosening the four
fixing bolts .
3 Positioning the diagonal register to zero:
Turn the hexagon  below the block  until
the distance between the upper stop  of the
eccentric sleeve O.S. and the eccentric bolt 
is 5 mm.
4 Setting the central position for the new
servo-drive:
Connect the plug  to the servo-drive . Set
the diagonal register display to 0,00 on the
central control console.
Alternatively, it is possible to set the variable
Eccentric sleeve voltage of the potentiometer to 5V at the
behind block servo-drive conversion module SSM in the
distribution box of the printing unit.
5 Installing the servo-drive:
When installing the servo-drive, the backlash
(flank clearance) is of no importance and can
be neglected. When tightening the fixing bolts,
5mm pull the servo-drive outwards (away from the
PU). Thus the backlash of the two pinions is
adjusted.
Note:
Do not loosen the eccentric bolt .
After loosening the eccentric bolt, the plate cylinder
Servo-drive diagonal register, e.g. SM 102 and the dampening distributor must be adjusted
parallel to each other again.

310
Inking unit Servo-drive lateral register

Servo-drive lateral register

Place of installation
The servo-drives for the lateral register  are
located on the operator side of the printing units.

D.S.

O.S.

Place of installation of servo-drive for lateral


register O.S.

Layout and task


The servo-drive for the lateral register is a dc
motor with brushes and potentiometer for position
feedback.

It is used for adjustment of the plate cylinder in


lateral direction.

Servo-drive lateral register

311
Inking unit Servo-drive lateral register

Technical data
Motor data

U = DC 12 V

Potentiometer data

U = DC 10 V
R = 10 k

Terminal assignment

Terminal Function

1
black black DC 12 V (motor)
yellow
6 6 red
2

beige
5 5 blue
4 DC 10 V (potentiometer)
4 4 5  potentiometer
yellow/green 6
brown
3 3 brown
Potentiometer tap

blue
2 2 blue
1 1

Terminal strip of servo-drive for lateral register

312
Inking unit Servo-drive lateral register

Removal and installation

Attention: Small parts can fall into the press during


disassembly!

 Nut

 Gear wheel

 Nut
2.2...2.27 mm
 Nut

 Anti-rotation element

 Sleeve

2.2...2.27 mm
1 Positioning the lateral register to zero:
Turn the gear wheel  with the help of the nut
 until the distance of 2.2...2.27 mm is
obtained.

Note:
Lateral register O.S. Use a feeler gauge!

2 Unscrew the nut .


3 Loosen the nut .
4 Take out the potentiometer and disconnect the
cable from the terminal strip.
5 Attach the anti-rotation element  to the new
potentiometer.
6 Connect and install the new potentiometer and
turn until the display on the central control
console indicates 0,00.
7 Install in reverse sequence.
8 If you want to make a precision correction,
loosen the nut . To correct the value insert a
screw driver in the sleeve  and turn the
potentiometer axis slightly. Check the value
displayed on the central control console.

313
Inking unit Servo-drive circumferential register

Servo-drive circumferential register

Place of installation

The servo-drives for the circumferential register 


are located on the drive side of the printing units.

O.S.

D.S.

Place of installation of servo-drive for circumferen-


tial register D.S.

Layout and task


The servo-drive for the circumferential register is a
dc motor with brushes and potentiometer for
position feedback.

It is used for adjustment of the plate cylinder in


circumferential direction.

Servo-drive for circumferential register D.S.

314
Inking unit Servo-drive circumferential register

Technical data
Motor data

U = DC 12 V

Potentiometer data

U = DC 10 V
R = 10 k

Terminal assignment

Terminal Function

1
black black DC 12 V (motor)
yellow
6 6 red
2

beige
5 5 blue
4 DC 10 V (potentiometer)
4 4 5  potentiometer
yellow/green 6
brown
3 3 brown
Potentiometer tap

blue
2 2 blue
1 1

Terminal strip of servo-drive for circumferential


register

315
Inking unit Servo-drive circumferential register

Removal and installation

Attention: Small parts can fall into the press during


disassembly!

 Nut
6.2...6.3 mm
6.2...6.3 mm  Gear wheel

 Locking screw

 Anti-rotation element

 Nut

1 Positioning the circumferential register to zero:


Turn the gear wheel  with the help of the nut
 until the distance of 6.2...6.3 mm is obtained.
Note:
Use a feeler gauge!

2 Disconnect the potentiometer from the terminal


Circumferential register D.S. strip.
3 Loosen the locking screw  and take out the
potentiometer.
4 Attach the anti-rotation element  to the new
potentiometer.
5 Connect and install the new potentiometer and
turn until the display on the central control
console indicates 0,00.
6 Install in reverse sequence.
7 If you want to make a precision correction,
loosen the nut . Correct the value by slightly
turning the potentiometer. Check the value
displayed on the central control console.

316
Inking unit Inking unit temperature control

Inking unit temperature control

Activation and inactivation

Selecting the display

The inking unit temperature control can be


activated and inactivated at the central control
console.
Power supply is effected via plug E39-X1.
On 7- and 8-colour presses, the required
second inking unit temperature control is
switched on and off via plug E39a-X1.

Actual valueā/āfine display of


control console display (ZID)

Inking unit temperature control


on/off

317
Inking unit E39 Inking unit temperature control

E39 Inking unit temperature control

Connection
Different models are available which differ in
power. 7- and 8-colour presses require two inking
unit temperature controls (E39 and E39a). The
power supply for the unit(s) comes from the
printing press.
The illustration opposite is an example. The units
differ in cabinet height and width.



Connection of inking unit temperature control E39

Pin assignment E39-X1 (only model 3/8)

Pin Function

3 Phase U
7 Phase V
1 6
9 Phase W
2 7
PE conductor
3 8
4 9 Remain- –
ing pins
5 10

      
   

318
Inking unit E39 Inking unit temperature control

Pin assignment E39-X1


(models 6/12; 6/16; 9/20 and 9/25)
Pin Function

1 Phase U


2 Phase V

 3 Phase W
 
 PE conductor


Remain- –
ing pins

4Ćpole
cable

      
   

319
Inking unit E39 Inking unit temperature control

320
Dampening 1...nM1 Pan roller motors

Dampening

1...nM1 Pan roller motors

Place of installation / plug connections


 Connector 1...nM1-X3
( power supply )

1...nM1-X3

1M1 2M1 3M1

Pan roller motors 1...nM1 at PU/CU on D.S.

Pin assignment

6 Pin Function
7 5
8 4 1 X motor line
1
3 2 Y motor line
9
3 Z motor line
10 14 4 Hall-effect sensor, signal C
5 Hall-effect sensor, tacho signal
11 13
12 6 Hall-effect sensor, signal B
2
7 DC 15 V
Connector 1...nM1-X3, pins in plug insert 8 Hall-effect sensor, signal A
9 Ground of DC 15 V
10 –
11 Motor code
12 –
13 –
14 –
PE

321
Dampening 1...nM45 Blower motor for dampening system

1...nM45 Blower motor for dampening system

Place of installation and task


The blower combination with the motor 1...nM45 is
located under the guard of the inking and dampen-
nM45 ing rollers.
The motor is a dc motor with brushes.
It is integrated in the middle of the blower bar and
drives a cross-flow fan.

Place of installation of blower motor for dampening


system

Pin assignment

Pin Function

1 Enable message
2 Ground 24 V
3 DC 24 V
1
2
3

Plug of blower motor for dampening system

322
Dampening 1...nB32 Sensor ”Dampening solution control”

1...nB32 Sensor ”Dampening solution control”

Place of installation
The capacitive sensor is located on the paper
infeed side, D.S., in the dampening solution
fountain.

nB32

Place of installation of sensor ”Dampening solution


control”

Layout/connection

Core Function

brown DC 24 V

blue ground 24 V

black message

Sensor ”Dampening solution control”

323
Dampening 1...nB32 Sensor ”Dampening solution control”

Task/function
The capacitive sensor 1...nB32 monitors the level
of the dampening solution in the fountain.
The sensor works correctly when its sensing area
is immersed in the dampening solution.
With its sensing area immersed, the sensor is
actuated. If the level of the dampening solution
drops, the sensor will only change its circuit state
if its sensing area is no longer in contact with the
water film.
The sensor is supplied with a stabilized direct
voltage of DC 24 V.

324
Dampening E40 Central dampening solution supply/
cooling and circulating unit

E40 Central dampening solution supply/cooling and circulating unit

Layout of central dampening solution supply


The central dampening solution supply is in a
separate cabinet. Generally, this cabinet is in the
proximity of the central control cabinet. It is
connected to the CP Tronic control system via a
serial interface. The power supply and circuit-

ÁÁÁÁ
breakers are in the control cabinet of the printing
press. For details please refer to the manufacturer’s

ÁÁÁÁ manual.

ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
E40-X1: power supply

ÁÁÁÁ
E40-X2: serial interface
X1 X2

Central dampening solution supply Technotrans

Á
Á
X2

Á
Á
X1

Central dampening solution supply Baldwin, rear view

325
Dampening E40 Central dampening solution supply/
cooling and circulating unit

Pin assignment X1, central dampening solution supply

Pin Function

3 Phase U

1 6
7
9
Phase V
Phase W
*)
2 7 PE conductor
3 8
Remain- –
4 9 ing pins
5 10

380...415 V " 15V


* ) AC
AC 460...500 V " 15V
at 50Hz
at 60Hz
Connector E40-X1, coming from the press

326
Dampening E40 Central dampening solution supply/
cooling and circulating unit

Layout of cooling and circulating unit


The cooling and circulating units have no serial
interfaces. The power supply and circuit-breakers
are in the control cabinet of the printing press. A
manufacturer’s manual is available.

E40-X1: power supply

E40-X1

Cooling and circulating unit

Pin assignment X1, cooling and circulating unit


Pin Function

2 AC 230 V
4 Zero 230 V
1 6
2 7 PE conductor
3 8
Remain- –
4 9 ing pins
5 10

Connector E40-X1, coming from the press

327
Dampening E41 Dampening solution mixing unit

E41 Dampening solution mixing unit


The dampening solution mixing unit is an additional
unit for cooling and circulating devices without
integral additive-mixing units. It admixes additives to
the dampening solution. Power supply comes
directly from the mains and not from the press.
For details please refer to the manufacturer’s
documentation.

Dampening solution mixing unit

328
Central lubrication Basic concept

Central lubrication

Basic concept

Distinction
Two lubrication systems supply the press with
lubricant:

– grease lubrication system (for the delivery),


– oil lubrication system (for the printing units,
feeder and bearings on the D.S. and O.S. of
the delivery chain sprocket shaft).

The grease lubrication system is divided into:


– lubrication circuit 1 (chain lubrication),
– lubrication circuit 2 (bearing lubrication).

The oil lubrication system is divided into:


– the circular lubrication system (drive side),
– the distributing lubrication system (operator
side and some lubricating points on the drive
side).

329
Central lubrication Service display

Service display
Button sequence

Oil lubrication
 Pressure monitoring 1bar, 1F33 (flashes if the
pressure switch was not actuated).
 Pressure monitoring 12bars, 1F34 (flashes if the
pressure switch was not actuated).
 Oil pump M44 (flashes if motor circuit-breaker
15Q44 has responded).
 Number of cylinder revolutions since the last
distributing lubrication. After completion of
lubrication the counter is automatically zeroed.
 Distributing lubrication initiated manually (only
when press is on ”Run”).
Service display ”Oil lubrication”
 Number of cylinder revolutions at which
automatic oil lubrication is initiated.

330
Central lubrication Service display

Grease lubrication
7 Sensor ”Lubrication monitoring 2” – 12 B77
(bearing lubrication) (flashes if sensor is not
actuated).
8 Sensor ”Lubrication monitoring 1” – 12 B47
(chain lubrication) (flashes if sensor is not
actuated).
9 Motor grease lubrication 12M47.
ß Number of cylinder revolutions since the last
chain lubrication. After completion of lubrication
the counter is automatically zeroed.

Service display ”Grease lubrication”


q Number of cylinder revolutions since the last
bearing lubrication. After completion of
lubrication the counter is automatically zeroed.
w Chain lubrication initiated manually (lubrication
circuit 1); (only when press is on ”Run”).
e Bearing lubrication initiated manually (lubrica-
tion circuit 2); (only when press is on ”Run”).
r Number of cylinder revolutions at which
bearing lubrication is initiated automatically.
t Number of cylinder revolutions at which chain
lubrication is initiated automatically.

331
Central lubrication Fault messages

Fault messages

Display ”Entire press/warning”


Button sequence

Dependent on the press model, the fault display


”Entire press” / ”Warning” shows the fault symbols of
the grease lubrication or oil lubrication system:

Oil lubrication not possible Oil lubrication has not occurred.


– After main switch ”On” and changeover
between circular and distributing lubrication,
the oil pressure has not been built up within
3 minutes.
– Pressure switch 1F33 (1 bar) or pressure
switch 1F34 (12 bars) not actuated.
– Filter unit clogged.

Grease lubrication not possible Chain or bearing lubrication has not occurred.
– The sensor ”Lubrication monitoring 1” –
12 B47 or the sensor ”Lubrication monitoring
2” – 12 B77 has not responded within
10 minutes.
– Solenoid valve 12 Y78 defective. Changeover
between chain and bearing lubrication is not
possible.
– Motor for grease lubrication 12 M 47 defective.

The motor circuit-breaker has tripped. Oil pump


Motor circuit-breaker Q 44
M 44 not ready to run.
has tripped

The audible signal devices 11H55 While lubrication is in progress, a warning signal
and 12H55 give out a warning sounds if the printing speed is u 3 000 i.p.h.

332
Central lubrication Grease lubrication

Grease lubrication

Block diagram

15 Q 66

15 Q 47
12B47
15 K47 M 12M47 12Y78
12B77

11H55

12H55

Electronic control system


Control line
Power supply

Grease line

Block diagram of grease lubrication

 Pressure limiting valve (38 bars) 12M47 Motor ”Grease lubrication”


 Metering elements 12Y78 Changeover grease lubrication
15Q66 Main switch 12B47 Lubrication monitoring 1 (chains)
15Q47 Motor circuit-breaker 12B77 Lubrication monitoring 2 (bearings)
15K47M Contactor 11H55 Audible signal device (audio alert feeder)
12H55 Audible signal device (audio alert delivery)

333
Central lubrication Grease lubrication

Place of installation
The motor for grease lubrication is located on
the D.S. of the last printing unit. The sensors
”Lubrication monitoring” are fitted at the first
progressive distributor behind the motor.

Layout
 Motor ”Grease lubrication” 12 M 47
 Grease reservoir
 Pressure relief valve
 Lubrication monitoring 2–12 B77 (bearing
lubrication)
 Lubrication monitoring 1–12 B47 (chain
lubrication)
 Progressive distributor
 Changeover grease lubrication 12 Y78
(between bearing and chain lubrication)

Components of the grease lubrication system

Function
When the press is switched on, the grease lubrica-
tion system is ready for operation. The motor for
grease lubrication 12M47 delivers the lubricant to
the progressive distributors via solenoid valve
12 Y78. Depending on the position of the solenoid
valve, either the chains in the delivery (lubrication
circuit 1) or the bearings (lubrication circuit 2) are
supplied with lubricant.
The progressive distributors pass the lubricant to
the lubricating points via pistons. The progressive
distributors are sequence-controlled and thus all
pistons move uniformly. For this reason, only the
movement of one piston is monitored per lubrica-
tion circuit.

334
Central lubrication Grease lubrication

Monitoring the lubrication system


Inductive sensors monitor the two lubrication
circuits. Each is equipped with an LED and can
LED assume two circuit states.
– Pin of progressive distributor extended, sensor
damped:
LED is lit.
– Pin of progressive distributor retracted, sensor
not damped:
LED is not lit.

On presses with standard delivery, the sensor


12 B47 (chain lubrication) is actuated twice while
lubrication is in progress and three times on pres-
Sensor with LED monitoring the lubrication circuit ses with extended delivery.
The sensor 12 B77 (bearing lubrication) is actuated
once while lubrication is in progress.
If the sensors do not switch within 10 minutes after
a lubrication process was triggered, the electronic
control system shuts the motor for grease lubrica-
tion down. The warning ”Grease lubrication not
possible” appears.

335
Central lubrication Grease lubrication

Triggering a lubrication process


When the press is switched on, the grease
lubrication system is ready for operation. Lubrication
is triggered either automatically:

 chain lubrication every 2 500 to 30 000 cylinder


revolutions; (after a basic initialization, the
cycle is preset to 20 000 cylinder revolutions),
 bearing lubrication every 200 000 cylinder
revolutions,
or manually by actuating the function button
”Manual chain or bearing lubrication”.
Central lubrication selected, press on ”Run”

Setting the lubrication cycle for lubrication circuit 1 (chain lubrication)


Button sequence

 Number of cylinder revolutions for automatic


chain lubrication (lubrication circuit 1). The
cylinder revolutions can be set in the range
from 2 500 to 30 000 in steps of 2 500.

Note:
To set the lubrication cycle an additional button must
be fitted on the EAM (input/output module). Before
fitting or removing this button, turn off the main
switch 15 Q 66 on the central control cabinet ZSG!

Number of cylinder revolutions set to 20000

336
Central lubrication Grease lubrication

Attention: Even if the main switch is turned off, the press


is not voltage-free and there are current-
conducting components in the central control
cabinet!

The input/output module EAM is on the underside


EAM
of the central control console. Plug the additional
button into slot 7 of the EAM - X12.

 Turn off the main switch 15Q66.


 Fit the button.
EAM-X12
Group
 Turn on the main switch 15Q66.
Now press the button you just fitted plus group
button 2 on the central control console.

Set the cylinder revolutions with the left-hand + / –


buttons.
– 2 500
Lubrication cycle for delivery – 5 000
30000 – L
– 25 000
– 30 000

Remove the button from slot 7 of the EAM - X12.


Then check the cylinder revolutions for chain
lubrication (lubrication circuit 1) in the service
display ”Central lubrication” on the central control
console.
Changing the lubrication cycle
Note:
The value for bearing lubrication (lubrication circuit
2) is set to 200 000 cylinder revolutions and is
non-adjustable.

Pressure relief valve of the motor


The motor for grease lubrication is protected by a
pressure relief valve. In the case of malfunctions,
this valve prevents the building up of impermissible
high pressures in the lubrication system and opens
at a pressure of 150 bars.

337
Central lubrication Oil lubrication

Oil lubrication

Block diagram

15 Q 66

15 Q 44
1F33
15X3 M44 Y67
1F34

11H55

12H55

Electronic control system


Control line
Power supply

Oil line

Block diagram of oil lubrication

 Pressure relief valve (18 bars) Y67 Changeover oil lubrication


 Metering elements 1F33 Pressure monitoring (1 bar)
15Q66 Main switch 1F34 Pressure monitoring (12 bars)
15Q44 Motor circuit-breaker 11H55 Audible signal device (audio alert feeder)
15X3 Plug 12H55 Audible signal device (audio alert delivery)
M44 Oil pump

338
Central lubrication Oil lubrication

Place of installation
The oil reservoir with oil pump M44, filter unit,
solenoid valve Y67 and pressure relief valve is
located on the D.S. under the footboard (on
presses with up to 5 units at the last unit, with 6 or
more units in the middle).
On presses with coating unit the guard serves as
oil reservoir and contains the oil pump, filter unit
and valves.
The two pressure switches, 1 F 33 and 1 F 34, are
fitted at the first printing unit under the feeder.

Layout
 Oil pump M 44
 Filter unit
 Oil lubrication press – Y 67 (changeover
between circular lubrication and distributing
lubrication)
 Pressure relief valve (18 bars)
 Pressure switch 1F34 (12 bars)
 Pressure switch 1 F 33 (1 bar)
 Oil reservoir

Components of the oil lubrication system

339
Central lubrication Oil lubrication

Function
Switching on the press activates oil lubrication, i.e.
the circular lubrication system is active and
continuously lubricates the gears on the D.S.
For the changeover to distributing lubrication the
solenoid valve Y67 must be actuated. This is
effected either automatically or with the function
button ”Manual distributing lubrication”. The
distributing lubrication system supplies the bearings
on the D.S. and O.S. with oil.
After every changeover between distributing and
circular lubrication, the oil pressure must build up
within 3 minutes; otherwise the electronic control
system outputs a fault message.

Circular lubrication
The oil is continuously fed to the lubricating points
via the oil riser and drip pan. The circular lubrication
system works at an oil pressure y 1 bar. The oil
pressure is monitored by pressure switch 1 F 33
(1 bar).
The oil flowing back down the side frames on the
D.S. is returned to the lubrication circuit. Through a
return line the oil flows either into the oil reservoir or
into the coating unit guard. The return line is fitted
above the cable duct on the D.S.

Distributing lubrication
The distributing lubrication system supplies the
lubricating points through piston distributors. The oil
pressure in the system is y 12 bars and monitored
by pressure switch 1 F 34 (12 bars).
On SM102-presses the residual oil is collected in
the bases and can be drained off through a drain
cock on the O.S.
On CD102-presses the residual oil is collected in a
reservoir on the D.S. which can be emptied.

340
Central lubrication Oil lubrication

Triggering a lubrication process


Distributing lubrication is triggered:

 automatically every 45 000 cylinder revolutions


or
 by actuating the function button ”Manual
distributing lubrication”.

For activation the printing press must be on ”Run”


(3 000 i.p.h.).

Central lubrication selected, press on ”Run”

Filter unit
 Optical differential pressure indicator

 Filter housing with cartridge

The filter unit is fitted between the pump and the


solenoid valve. The optical differential pressure
indicator shows the degree of soiling of the filter
cartridge:
– Green: filter cartridge okay
– Red: change filter cartridge

If the filter cartridge is soiled, the oil pressure


between the oil pump and filter unit rises. The relief
Filter unit valve in the filter unit opens the bypass and the oil
flows to the lubricating points without having been
filtered. Change the filter at least every 6 months.

341
Central lubrication Oil lubrication

Changing the filter

Changing the filter

 Optical differential pressure indicator

The tightening torque for the filter housing must be


120 Nm +/– 15 Nm.

Pressure relief valve of the oil pump


A pressure relief valve is installed to protect the oil
pump. In the case of malfunctions, this valve
prevents the building up of impermissible high
pressures in the lubrication system. It opens at a
pressure of 18 bars and the oil flows back into the
coating unit guard or the oil reservoir.

342
Central lubrication M44 Oil pump

M44 Oil pump

Place of installation
On presses with coating unit, the oil pump is
located on the D.S. of the coating unit, below the
footboard.

Location of oil pump on presses with coating unit, D.S.

On presses without coating unit, the oil pump is


installed at the oil reservoir. The oil reservoir is
located on the D.S. under the footboard (on
presses with up to 5 printing units at the last
printing unit).

Location of oil pump on presses with up to 5 PUs

343
Central lubrication M44 Oil pump

On presses with 6 or more units, the oil reservoir is


bigger and located in the middle of the press, under
the footboard on the D.S.

Location of oil pump on presses with 6 or more PUs

Pin assignment

Pin Function

A2 AC 400 / 480 V phase U


A B C
1
B3 AC 400 / 480 V phase V
2
3 C2 AC 400 / 480 V phase W
4
PE conductor
5

Plug M44-X1

344
Central lubrication 12M47 Motor for grease lubrication

12M47 Motor for grease lubrication

Place of installation
The motor for grease lubrication 12M47 is located
on the D.S. of the delivery.

Motor for grease lubrication with grease reservoir

Pin assignment
Plug 12M47-X1

Pin Function
3
1 DC 24 V
1
2 Grease lubrication delivery chains
2
3 –
PE
PE –

Plug 12M47-X1

345
Central lubrication 1F33 Pressure monitoring
oil lubrication 1bar

1F33 Pressure monitoring oil lubrication 1bar

Place of installation
The pressure switch ”Pressure monitoring oil
lubrication 1 bar” 1F33 is located on the drive
side of the first printing unit, under the sheet
alignment system. It is accessible through the
door between the feeder and first printing unit on
the O.S.

Place of installation ”Pressure monitoring


oil lubrication 1 bar”, 1F33

346
Central lubrication 1F34 Pressure monitoring
oil lubrication 12bars

1F34 Pressure monitoring oil lubrication 12bars

Place of installation
The pressure switch ”Pressure monitoring oil
lubrication 12 bars” 1F34 is located on the O.S.
of the first printing unit, under the feeder. It is
accessible through the door between the feeder
and first printing unit on the O.S.

Place of installation ”Pressure monitoring


oil lubrication 12 bars”, 1F34

347
Central lubrication 12B47 Lubrication monitoring 1
12B77 Lubrication monitoring 2

12B47 Lubrication monitoring 1 and


12B77 Lubrication monitoring 2

Layout
The sensor 12 B47 for chain lubrication monitoring
and the sensor 12 B77 for bearing lubrication moni-
toring are of identical design.

 LED
 Sensor
 Locking nut
 Receptacle
 Plug
 Stop pin
 Sleeve
 Distributor

12B47 Lubrication monitoring 1 and


12B77 lubrication monitoring 2

Connection
Input 47 or 77 at EAK 12:
0 ¢ sensor not damped (LED off)
1 ¢ sensor damped (LED lit)

348
Central lubrication 12B47 Lubrication monitoring 1
12B77 Lubrication monitoring 2

Pin assignment

Marking Colour Function

47 or 77 black signal

+1 brown DC 24 V

–1 blue 

Sensor ”Lubrication monitoring”

Removal and installation


To fit the sensor screw the receptacle into the
sleeve using a copper disk and tighten it up. In
doing so, align the receptacle in such a way that
the sensor can be screwed in parallel to the
longitudinal axis of the distributor.

Screw the sensor manually into the receptacle until


it contacts the stop pin and secure it with the
locking nut. Then close the threaded hole of the
receptacle from the bottom using the plug.

349
Central lubrication 12B47 Lubrication monitoring 1
12B77 Lubrication monitoring 2

350
Pneumatic system 15Y11 Admission of pressure, pneumatic system

Pneumatic system

15Y11 Admission of pressure, pneumatic system

Place of installation
The solenoid valve ”Admission of pressure,
pneumatic system” 15Y11 is fastened to the side
frame on the O.S. of the feeder and accessible
through the protecting door.

15Y11

Admission of pressure, pneumatic system 15Y11


with plug

Task
When the pressure has been built up ( u5 bars ),
the solenoid valve switches the pneumatic energy
through the piping.

351
Pneumatic system 15Y11 Admission of pressure, pneumatic system

Pin assignment
Plug 15Y11-X1

Pin Function

1 DC 24 V
1 2 Signal 4 mA ... 20 mA
3 3 –
PE –
PE
2

Plug 15Y11-X1

352
Pneumatic system 15B14 Pressure sensor ”Pneumatic system”

15B14 Pressure sensor ”Pneumatic system”

Place of installation

The pressure sensor ”Pneumatic system” 15B14


is located at the side frame on the O.S. of the
feeder where it measures the air pressure in the
pneumatic piping.

15B14

Place of installation of pressure sensor ”Pneumatic


system” 15B14

353
Pneumatic system 15B14 Pressure sensor ”Pneumatic system”

Pin assignment
Plug 15B14-X1

Pin Function
3
1 1 DC 24 V
2 2 Sensor signal 4 mA ... 20 mA
PE 3 –
PE –

Pressure sensor and connector

354
Pneumatic system E4 Pneumatic system compressor

E4 Pneumatic system compressor

Technical data
Technical data, see operating instructions 71.102.9100

Pin assignment

Pin Function

A2 AC 400 / 480 V phase U


A B C B3 AC 400 / 480 V phase V
1
2
C2 AC 400 / 480 V phase W
3 C4 DC 24 V
4 A5 Pressure switch F45
5 B5 Blow-off valve Y68
PE conductor

Plug E4-X1

355
Pneumatic system E4 Pneumatic system compressor

356
Suction and blast air 1M9 Blast air regulation at the feeder

Suction and blast air

1M9 Blast air regulation at the feeder

Block diagram
The blast air regulation at the feeder adapts the
Displays blast air pressure at the suction head to the press
speed and ensures that the printing material is
MID11 ZID
fanned.
MID12 DNK The blast air pressure is regulated by servo-drive
1M9 which controls a relief valve.
DSK The blast air pressure depends on two factors:
IDS – the thickness of the stock (e.g. paper
calliper);
– the production speed (preset speed).
In the operator program of CPTronic the blast air
EAK ESK SVM regulation can be switched on and off.
”Automatic blast air regulation switched on”
means:
characteristic-curve-dependent blast air regulation.
SSK SAK REK2 The blast air pressure is automatically adapted by
the CPTronic operator program on the basis of the
entered paper thickness and the preset press
1SSM1 speed.
By pressing the right-hand +/– buttons on the
1M9 control console the characteristic curve stored in
the CPTronic control system can be modified
manually.
M
”Automatic blast air regulation switched off”
Blast air regulation means:
manual blast air setting.
Legend: Data lines
The blast air pressure is set independently of the
Control lines paper thickness and preset speed.
It can be modified with the right-hand +/– buttons
Block diagram: blast air regulation at the feeder on the control console.
The blast air regulation at the feeder does not
intervene in the press control.

357
Suction and blast air 1M9 Blast air regulation at the feeder

Characteristic-curve-dependent blast air regulation

Selection of the characteristic-curve-dependent


blast air regulation

Function button ”Blast air regulation at the feeder


on / off” 

If the background of the symbol is light, the


characteristicĆcurveĆdependent blast air regulation
is switched on.
The characteristic curves are stored in the
CPTronic operator program. The operator program
automatically selects a suitable characteristic curve
dependent on the thickness of the stock and the
press speed.

  
    

358
Suction and blast air 1M9 Blast air regulation at the feeder

Selection: manual change of characteristic-curve-


dependent blast air regulation

Function button ”Changing the slope” 


When you switch over to the actual value display
and the background of the symbol is light, you can
set the slope of the characteristic curves manually
(and thus deviate from the CPTronic-values).
The setting is made at the control console with the
right-hand +/– buttons.

Manual change of the characteristicĆcurveĆdepenĆ


dent blast air regulation

For a 0.05 mm thick paper the setting range for the


p [bar] slope is as follows for SM 102 and CD 102:
1.0 Minimum: 0% (corresponds to the
0%-characteristic curve)
Maximum:100% (corresponds to the
0.9
100%-characteristic curve)

0.8

0.7

0.6

0.5

0.4

0.3

0.2
0 3000 6000 9000 12000 15000
n [sheets / h]

Field of characteristic curves for a printing paper


with a thickness of 0.05 mm (corresponds to a
paper weight of approx. 50 g/m2)

359
Suction and blast air 1M9 Blast air regulation at the feeder

Manual blast air setting

Selection: changing the manual blast air setting

Function button ”Manual setting of blast air at


feeder” actuated (ON) 

The manual blast air setting is activated automati-


cally when the characteristic-curve-dependent blast
air regulation is switched off. It does not depend on
the paper thickness or preset speed.
In this mode you can enter a percent value which
is displayed on the control console display ZID.
The setting is made at the control console with the
right-hand +/– buttons.

  
       
 


The setting range for SM 102 and CD 102 is as


p [bar] follows:
Minimum: 20% (corresponds to 0.2 bar above
1.0 atmospheric pressure)
Maximum:100% (corresponds to 1.0 bar above
atmospheric pressure)

0.8

0.6

0.4

0.2
20 40 60 80 100
ZID display [%]

 

         
 


360
Suction and blast air 1M9 Blast air regulation at the feeder

Place of installation
The blast air regulation is located on the bottom
crossbar of the feeder in direction of the drive side
(D.S.).

O.S.

D.S.

Blast air regulation at the feeder

361
Suction and blast air 1M9 Blast air regulation at the feeder

Layout and task


Dependent on the thickness of the printing
material and the production speed, the blast
air regulation at the feeder adapts the blast
air pressure at the suction head and thus
ensures that the printing material is fanned.
The blast air regulation at the feeder consists
of the following components:
 Servo-drive 1M9 with dc motor with
brushes, flange-mounted gear unit and
potentiometer for position feedback.
 Motor bracket with protecting cover and
threaded spindle inside
 Adjustable relief valve
 Manometer measuring the pressure
above atmospheric (at feeder frame)
The servo-drive and relief valve are con-
nected with each other by means of a
mechanical coupling.

Servo-drive with adjustable relief valve

Manometers at feeder frame for pressure above


atmospheric and low pressure

362
Suction and blast air 1M9 Blast air regulation at the feeder

Technical data
Motor data

U = DC 24 V
P=5W

Potentiometer data

U = DC 10 V
R = 10 k

Pin assignment
Contact Assignment

+ 1 Motor, + (DC 24 V)
1

M –
2
2
3
Motor, – (DC 24 V)
Potentiometer, + (DC 10 V)
+
3
3 4 Potentiometer wiper
4
5 Potentiometer, – (DC 10 V)
4
2
1 5

5

Pin assignment: blast air regulation at the feeder

363
Suction and blast air 1M9 Blast air regulation at the feeder

Removal and installation

Attention: Small parts can fall into the press during


disassembly!

1 Inch the press until all blast air ducts at the


rotary valve in the suction head are closed.
2 Turn off the main switch.
3 Loosen the four fixing bolts  and remove
the protecting cover .

(4×)

4 Unscrew the connector 1M9–X1  and


(4×) withdraw it from the servo-drive . Loosen
the four fixing bolts  and remove the
servo-drive together with the sleeve .
5 Turn on the main switch (blast air is present).

364
Suction and blast air 1M9 Blast air regulation at the feeder

6 Turn the threaded spindle  manually


until the manometer measuring the
pressure above atmospheric at the feeder
 indicates 0.6 bar. Check whether all
blast air ducts at the rotary valve in the
suction head are closed.
7 Turn off the main switch.
8 Connect the connector  with the new
servo-drive  and tighten up the bolts.
9 Turn on the main switch.

ß Switch off the automatic blast air regulation


(this activates the manual blast air setting).

Note:
Also refer to the section ”Manual blast air
setting”.

q Operate the servo-drive  with the


right-hand +/– buttons at no-load until the
value 60% is indicated on the control
console display ZID.

Note:
While doing this, do not place the servo-
drive  on the threaded spindle .

365
Suction and blast air 1M9 Blast air regulation at the feeder

w Push the servo-drive  onto the threaded


spindle  so that the pin  engages with
two slots of the sleeve .

Note:
Take care that the pin of the threaded spindle is
not turned more than "90° while doing this.
(4×)
e Fasten the servo-drive  with the four
fixing bolts .

r Let the servo-drive  run over the entire


operating range with the right-hand +/–
buttons (i.e. from 20% to 100%).

Note:
See also the next section ”Checking the
operating range”.

t Put the protecting cover  back in place


and fasten it with the four fixing bolts .

(4×)

366
Suction and blast air 1M9 Blast air regulation at the feeder

Checking the operating range

Selecting the service display

Incremental values for the servo-drive


”1M9 Blast air regulation at the feeder” 
Operating range for SM 102 and CD 102:
Incremental value ZID display Air pressure
[n] [%] [bar]
768 (min.) 20 0.2
2048 60 0.6
3328 (max.) 100 1.0

Note:
The incremental values may differ from the

   displayed percent values / air pressure by up to
"4 increments.

When you have finished checking, switch on the


characteristic-curve-dependent blast air
regulation.

367
Suction and blast air 1M9 Blast air regulation at the feeder

368
Other components E4a Varnish supply unit

Other components

E4a Varnish supply unit

Connections
The varnish supply unit receives 3AC 380 V and
AC 230 V from the printing press. Both voltages
pass through plug E4a-X1.
The varnish sensor is located at the coating pan on
the O.S. of the coating unit. It is connected to the
distribution box at the coating unit. From there a
E4a-X21 cable leads to the varnish supply unit, plug
E4a-X21.
The varnish supply unit is remotely controlled with
E4a-X22 a cable. This cable is connected to plug E4a-X22.

E4a-X1 The varnish supply unit is located under the


footboard on the D.S. of the coating unit.
A manufacturer’s manual is available.

Varnish supply unit

Pin assignment
E4a-X1

Pin Function

A1 –
A B C
A2 Phase L1
1
A3 –
2 A4 AC 230 V
3 A5 –
B1 –
4 B2 –
5 B3 Phase L2
B4 –
B5 –
C1 –
C2 Phase L3
C3 –
Plug E4a-X1, coming from the control cabinet C4 –
C5 Zero 230 V
PE conductor

369
Other components E4a Varnish supply unit

E4a-X21

Pin Function

2 3 1 DC 24 V (+1) for fault message


4 2 Fault message
6
1 5 3 Analog sensor signal:
0 ... 5 V
4 Conductive level sensor

Plug E4a-X21, control lines 5 DC 24 V


voltage for
6 Ground sensor

Fault messages
If the sensor ”Level in coating pan” B32 detects
that the level is too low and if the operating
mode ”Varnish circulation” has been selected
for the coating unit, a fault message is
transmitted to the CPTronic control system and
the audible signal devices 11H55 and 12H55
output a warning. It is possible that the fault
message is caused by the height adjustment of
the level controller ( coating pan insert ).

Sensor ”Level in coating pan” and level controller

370
Other components L-B32 Level in coating pan

L-B32 Level in coating pan

Place of installation
The sensor ”Level in coating pan” is located at the
coating pan on the O.S. of the coating unit.

Sensor ”Level in coating pan”

Connection, pin assignment


Plug E4a-X2:

3 Pin Colour Function


2 4
E4a-X2 1 brown DC 24 V (+1) for fault mes-
6 sage
1 5
2 grey Fault message
3 yellow Analog sensor signal:
183 170 171 L-LVT1-X2 0 ...5 V
4 – Conductive level sensor
blk br bl 5 green DC 24 V
voltage for
6 white Ground sensor
L-B32 Sensor

Connection of sensor ”Level in coating pan”

371
Other components L-B32 Level in coating pan

Layout, adjustment
 Coating pan
 Pan roller
 Sensor
 Sensor holder
 Level controller
 Adjusting screws
108 mm
Adjust the sensor so that the distance between
the upper edge of the sensor and the upper edge
of the sensor holder is 108 mm.
The height of the level controller can be regulated
by means of the adjusting screws. This influences
the level in the coating pan. The immersion depth
approx. 10 mm
of the pan roller in the varnish should be approx.
10 mm.

Mounting dimensions of sensor ”Level in coating pan”

372
Other components 12E2 Powder spray unit

12E2 Powder spray unit

Place of installation, layout


 Powder spray device
 Powder tube
 Blower motor with suction filter

The powder spray device is located on the O.S. of


the delivery. The motor is fitted on the O.S. of the
delivery, on the inside of the press. Different types
of powder spray devices can be connected to the
printing press. We distinguish between:

– powder spray devices without serial interface,


– powder spray devices with serial interface.

In the case of powder spray devices with serial


Powder spray device, powder tube and motor at interface, the motor is connected directly to the
delivery control box of the powder spray device.

Powder spray device with serial interface


Pin assignment 12E2-X1

Pin Function

A2 L2
B3 L1
  C2 L3

A4 AC 230 V

C5 Zero 230 V

PE



Plug 12E2-X1, coming from the press

373
Other components 12E2 Powder spray unit

Powder spray device without serial interface


Pin assignment 12E2-X2

The plug 12E2-X2 is at the distribution box of


the delivery.
Instead of the mechanical switch 12S68 a
proximity switch can be fitted in the feeder (e.g.
  Betatronic powder sprayers). This switch is then
connected directly to the powder spray device

and is not led via the distribution box or plug
 12E2-X2.

 Pin Function

A1 Switch ”Powder on” 12S68,
switch contact 2 (not with
proximity switch)
A2 DC 24 V for test button
A3 AC 230 V
Plug 12E2X2, coming from the press, distribution
A4 Switch ”Powder on” 12S68,
box at delivery
switch contact 1 (not with
proximity switch)
A5 Impression on ( AC 230 V)
B1 Test ( DC 24 V)
B2 Zero 230 V
B3 PE conductor
B4 Press turns ( AC 230 V)
B5 –
C1 – C5 –
PE

Pin assignment of proximity switch 12S68

Pin Function
3 1 Ground
4 2 2 DC 24 V
3 Signal
5 1 4 Ground
5 –

Plug of proximity switch

374
Other components 12E2 Powder spray unit

Correcting the beginning of powdering


Settings

The following settings are only required for


powder spray devices with serial interface.

Control panel at last printing unit / coating unit

Selector switch ”Safe” 1 Set the selector switch ”Safe” to ”Safe”.

Pushbutton ”Forward”/ 2 Inch the press until the front edge of the
”Backward” sheet is below the spray nozzles of the
powder tube.

Sheet of
paper

Required position of
front edge of sheet

Positioning the sheet of paper

Control panel at delivery

Press display MID

3 Read off the degree value indicated on the


press display MID.

 Display of degree value

Indication on the MID while press is in inching mode

375
Other components 12E2 Powder spray unit

Service display ”Delivery”

 Variable degree
can be changed by entering another
degree value.

 Standard degree
– cannot be changed
– depends on the press model.

Service display ”Delivery”

Entering the degree value 5 With the right-hand " buttons the degree
value read off at the press display MID under
3 can be entered. When the function button is
pressed, the variable degree  jumps back to
the standard degree value .


  


  


SM102 + extended + coating unit + coating unit


( CD102) High-pile delivery high-pile delivery + high-pile delivery + extended high-pile delivery

2 PUs 132°  101 ) 225°  102  83°  176  84°  177 


4 PUs 166°  250  259°  251  118°  326  119°  326 
5 PUs 3°  325  97°  326  315°  39  316°  40 
6 PUs 201°  39  294°  40  152°  114  153°  115 
7 PUs 38°  114  131°  115  349°  189  350°  189 
8 PUs 235°  189  328°  189  188°  263  188°  264 )

+ 74.6°  74.6  + 74.6°  74.6 


for every further for every further
coating unit coating unit

Degree values for the beginning of powdering SM102 (CD102)

376
Other components 12M35 Blower motor for powder spray device

12M35 Blower motor for powder spray device

Place of installation, filter change


The motor is located at the delivery. It is mounted
on the baseplate on the inside of the side frame, on
the O.S.
To change the suction filter, open the hinged cover
above the footboard.

12E2-X1

Blower motor for powder spray device at delivery

Layout
 Suction filter
 Air hose leading to powder spray device
 Plug connection M35-X1
 Baseplate
 Casing cover with rotor vanes underneath
 Compressed-air cooler
 Hood for motor fan
 Pressure relief valve

Compressor motor M35

377
Other components 12M35 Blower motor for powder spray device

Changing the rotor vanes


Remove the casing cover of the compressor motor
M35.

Note:
When you loosen the lower fixing bolts of the
casing cover, the compressed-air cooler becomes
loose as well. Hold it tight.

The rotor vanes are accessible. If they are shorter


than 27 mm (min. permissible length), they must
be replaced.

27mm
min.

Rotor vanes in motor 12M35

378
Other components 12S68 Switch ”Powdering cycle”

12S68 Switch ”Powdering cycle”

Place of installation
The switch ”Powdering cycle” 12S68 is located
on the D.S. of the delivery. In the case of
Betatronic from Grafix, Weko T 77Cs and Weko
Ionomat Cs, the switch is connected directly to
the powder spray device. With all other powder
spray devices the switch is connected to the
distribution box at the delivery.

Place of installation of switch ”Powdering cycle”,


12S68

379
Other components 12S9, -a, -b, -c Monitoring
the IR slide-in dryer

12S9, -a, -b, -c Monitoring the IR slide-in dryer

Place of installation
Each IR slide-in dryer is equipped with a safety
switch with NC and NO contacts. When the IR dryer
is inserted, the switching element provided on the
slide-in dryer actuates the safety switch on the drive
side.
Printing presses with several IR slide-in dryers
(extended delivery) have 4 switches (12S9, 12S9a,
12S9b, 12S9c). The NC contacts of the safety
switches are connected in series and the NO
contacts in parallel.

ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ
Place of installation of safety switch ”Monitoring
the IR slide-in dryer”

Layout and connection

 Sensor
 Openings for switching element
 Switching element (fitted on slide-in dryer)

Marking Function

21-22 NC contact
13-14 NO contact

NC contact ( s ) at input 9 of EAK12:


0¢ IR dryer(s) inserted
1¢ IR dryer(s) removed

NO contact ( s ) at input 9 of SEK:


Sensor ”Monitoring the IR slide-in dryer” 1¢ IR dryer(s) inserted
0¢ IR dryer(s) removed

380
Other components E8 Air supply cabinet

E8 Air supply cabinet

Connections
The air supply cabinet receives 2 AC 380 V and the
control signal ”Compressor on” from the printing
press.
A thermostat in the control cabinet signals
excessive temperatures to the CP Tronic control
system.
All cables are connected directly to terminal strips
and are not led via plugs. For the exact terminal
connections please refer to the circuit diagram and
technical instructions of the manufacturer.

Cable entries

Air supply cabinet, rear view

381
Other components E39 Inking unit temperature control

E39 Inking unit temperature control

Layout
The supply voltage for the inking unit temperature
control comes from the control cabinet and is
connected via plug E39-X1. A manufacturer’s
manual is available.
E39-X1: power supply

Inking unit temperature control

Pin assignment E39-X1

Pin Function

3 AC 230 V, phase U
6 1
7 AC 230 V, phase V
7 2
8 3 9 AC 230 V, phase W

9 4 PE
10 5

Connector E39-X1, coming from the press

382
Other components 12E3 Static electricity eliminator

12E3 Static electricity eliminator

Attention:   
       
Cut off the power supply before working on the
device!

Place of installation

Place of installation of static electricity eliminator

 Power supply for static electricity eliminator


(D.S.)
 Neutralizer bar
 Ion blowers
 Air-supported neutralizer bar

The static electricity eliminator consists of a power


supply unit with high-voltage transformer, a
neutralizer bar at the feeder and an air-supported
neutralizer bar at the delivery. Two ion blowers can
be additionally attached to the suction head
(optional).
Note:
The static electricity eliminator is optional and
therefore not fitted on all presses.
For subsequent installation, threads are provided in
the side frame as standard.

383
Other components 12E3 Static electricity eliminator

Layout
 Mains switch
 Pilot lamp
 Power supply unit
 Power cable AC 230 V
 Ion blowers at feeder
 Neutralizer bar at delivery

Note:
2 different versions are available. Differences in
the housing design do not affect the functions.

Static electricity eliminator 12E3 (ELTEX)

Static electricity eliminator, version 2 (SIMCO)

384
Other components 12E3 Static electricity eliminator

Task
The unit consisting of the power supply with
high-voltage transformer plus connected
neutralizer bars and ion blowers eliminates static
charges on the sheets of paper.

385
Other components WSA Intercom

WSA Intercom

Layout
 Loudspeaker
 Microphone
 Volume controller
 Illuminated pushbutton

The WSA consists of one intercom at the control


panel at the feeder and one at the control panel at
the delivery. Each intercom has a microphone,
loudspeaker, illuminated pushbutton, volume
controller and two electronic boards (main and
secondary boards). The electronic boards are
directly in the intercom.

Intercom at feeder

Intercom at delivery

386
Other components WSA Intercom

Function
 Secondary board with terminal strip
11WSA-X2/ 12WSA-X2
 Main board
 Connection for volume controller
 Connection for microphone
 Connection for secondary board 11WSA-
X1/ 12WSA-X1
 Connection for illuminated pushbutton
 Changeover switch main/secondary intercom

The intercom is set in such a way that the main


intercom (H) is at the delivery and the secondary
intercom (N) at the feeder.
When the illuminated pushbutton is pressed at the
delivery, speaking at the feeder is interrupted.
The priority between the two intercoms can be
reversed any time by means of the changeover
switch on the main board. The setting of the switch
must then be changed at both intercoms.
Electronic boards of intercom

387
Other components IDS Encoder

IDS Encoder

Place of installation

Encoder IDS

Place of installation of encoder in 1st PU

Task
The encoder is the basis for all speed- and
degree-dependent functions.
Examples of speed- and degree-dependent
functions:
– motor regulation,
– interrogation points of sensors,
– positioning for plate change.

388
Other components IDS Encoder

Function
The encoder generates three pulse signals:
5V
Track A – track A,
0V
– track B,
5V – track 0.
Track B
0V Track B is staggered by 90° in relation to track A.
5V Per revolution track 0 generates one zero pulse.
Track 0 The inverted signals are also available from all 3
0V tracks.
Pulse signals from the encoder Tracks A and B each generate 1024 pulses per
revolution.

Pin assignment
Pin Function
M, G, H DC+5V
G E
F
A, L, D  5V
H
M
D C Track A/

J B Track A
L
C F Track B/
A
K
B E Track B
K Track 0/
J Track 0
Encoder plug

389
Other components IDS Encoder

Installation variants
For presses with more than five printing units and
sheet turning device a second encoder IDS is
used. This IDS is used for closed-loop control of
the main drive. The mechanical installation and
removal of both IDS is identical (steps 1, 2, 3
and 6, 7, 8).
For the installation of the 2nd IDS (main drive
regulation) the zero point adjustment is not
required.

CD 102 Straight-printing presses


On CD102 presses the IDS is always fitted in
the 1st printing unit.

SM102 Straight-printing presses SM102 Perfector presses


IDS 1 IDS 2 IDS 1 IDS 2
SM102–2 Printing unit 1 – SM102–2 Printing unit 1 –
SM102–2+L Printing unit 1 – SM102–2+L Printing unit 1 –
SM102–3 Printing unit 1 – SM102–3 Printing unit 1 –
SM102–3+L Printing unit 1 – SM102–3+L Printing unit 1 –
SM102–4 Printing unit 1 – SM102–4 Printing unit 1 –
SM102–4+L Printing unit 1 – SM102–5 Printing unit 1 –
SM102–5 Printing unit 1 – SM102–5+L Printing unit 1 Printing unit 4/5
SM102–5+L Printing unit 4 – SM102–6 Printing unit 1 Printing unit 4/5
SM102–6 Printing unit 4 – SM102–6+L Printing unit 1 Printing unit 4/5
SM102–6+L Printing unit 4 – SM102–7 Printing unit 1 Printing unit 4/5
SM102–7 Printing unit 4 – SM102–7+L Printing unit 1 Printing unit 4/5
SM102–7+L Printing unit 4 – SM102–8 Printing unit 1 Printing unit 4/5/6
SM102–8 Printing unit 4 – SM102–8 P5 Printing unit 4 –
SM102–8+L Printing unit 4 – SM102–8+L Printing unit 1 Printing unit 4/5
SM102–8+L P5 Printing unit 4 –
SM102–8+L Printing unit 5 –

Removal and installation


1 Remove the plug.
2
2 Loosen the stud.
3 Remove the encoder.

ÁÁÁÁ 3
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ 1
Encoder IDS
ÁÁ
390
Other components IDS Encoder

4 Insert the gauge in printing unit 1.

Inserting the gauge

5 Line mark ”D”

Positioning to zero

5 Use the crank handle to turn the impression


cylinder to the zero position (line mark ”D”).

6 Fit the new encoder.


8 0 1 7 Connect the encoder.
8 Turn on the main switch 15Q66.

6
15Q66

ÁÁ
ÁÁ 7
ÁÁ
Fitting the new encoder IDS
ÁÁ
391
Other components IDS Encoder

ß 9 Turn the shaft of the encoder until 000.0 is


displayed in the MID.
ß Tighten the stud.

Note:
If the value 000.0 is not displayed in the MID,
continue with step q.

Á If the setting is correct, continue with r.

Á 9

Adjustment of the encoder IDS

q Loosen the locking nut.

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ w
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Turn the adjusting screw until 000.0 is

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
displayed in the MID.

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ e Tighten the locking nut.

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Á e
w
Á q
Precision adjustment of the encoder IDS

r Remove the gauge from PU 1.

Removing the gauge

392
Location diagrams ZSG Central control cabinet

Location diagrams

ZSG Central control cabinet

Location and layout

Equipment zone E
”Swing frame”

Equipment zone A Equipment zone D


”Power supply” ”Flat cable mounting plate”

Equipment zone B Equipment zone C


”Partition wall” ”Mounting rack / control devices”

Layout of central control cabinet

393
Location diagrams ZSG Central control cabinet

Equipment zone A ”Power supply”


This equipment zone contains the components
necessary for connection to the power supply. The
chapter ”Control systems” describes how the press
is connected to the power mains.

 15M1 Fan ”Power components”


 15L1 Power choke - power converter
 15R120 Load resistor
(only for presses with Preset)
 15R48 Load resistor
(only for presses with auxiliary pile
at the delivery)
 15F2 Semiconductor fuses
”Armature circuit M1”
 15Q66 Main switch
 15Z2 EMC filter
 15F1 Semiconductor fuses ”Mains”
15X1 Terminal strip
PE PE conductor

15Z1 EMC filter
15T1 Control transformer

Equipment zone ”Power supply”

394
Location diagrams ZSG Central control cabinet

Equipment zone B ”Partition wall”


SLT Converter power part
GRM5 Rectifier module
GRM24 Rectifier module
GRM48 Rectifier module
GRM120-2 Rectifier module

SLT
15Q61 Flat switch
”Transformer protection, secondary”
15Q62 Flat switch
”Transformer protection, secondary”
15Q37 Circuit-breaker
”Feeder / delivery main pile”
(not for Preset version)
15Q38 Circuit-breaker
GRM5 GRM24 GRM48 GRM120-2
”Feeder auxiliary pile”
15K37M Contactor ”Pile control”
STK1 (without Preset) /
LSR (with Preset)”
15K38M Contactor
”Pile control”
STK1 (with Preset) /
STK2 (without Preset)”
15K48A Contactor ”Power supply
15Q61 15Q37 15K37M 15K48A 15Q65
connecting part of power converter”
15Q2 Motor circuit-breaker
”Air supply cabinet E 8”
15Q65 Motor circuit-breaker
15Q62 15Q38 15K38M 15Q2
”Transformer protection, primary”

Equipment zone ”Partition wall”

SLT Converter power part


The converter power part SLT contains the power
electronics for driving the main drive. The chapter
”Control systems”, subchapter ”Direct-current main
drive” lists the components of the converter power
part.

SLT

Converter power part

395
Location diagrams ZSG Central control cabinet

GRM Rectifier modules


The equipment zone B ”Partition wall” contains four
rectifier modules.

 GRM5 Rectifier module


 GRM24 Rectifier module
F6
 GRM48 Rectifier module
F8 F3
 GRM120-2 Rectifier module
F5 F4
F7
The rectifier modules GRM24 and GRM48 are of
identical design and interchangeable.

Fuses:
Rectifier modules GRM F6, F7, F8 (GRM5) – 15 A, quick-acting,
6.3 x 32 mm
F5, F4 (GRM24 / GRM48) – 20 A, quick-acting,
6.3 x 32 mm
ca. AC 24 V 3 x ca. AC 35 V F3 (GRM120) – 32 A, slow-blowing
3 x ca. AC 26 V 3 x ca. AC 100 V

ca. DC 36 V ca. DC 120 V

ca. DC 33 V ca. DC 50 V

Voltages at the rectifier modules GRM

396
Location diagrams ZSG Central control cabinet

Equipment zone C ”Mounting rack / control devices”

Q.... Motor circuit-breakers


Q2a Q4 Q4a Q22 Q24 Q28 Q33 Q33a Q35 Q39

K....M Main contactors


22M K22M K33M K33aM K35M K39M

Earth-leakage monitor
Q39 Q39a Q40 Q44 Q22a Q80
IWM module

K39M K40M K22aM

K39M K39aM K46A K61A K50M K51M K52M K53M K54M K55M K56M K43M
Terminal amplifier module
Flat-cable output module
64 outputs
Flat-cable input module
KVM FAM 64 FEM 64
64 inputs

BAM BKM SPM VSM SVM SVM ESM FEM10 AUM

Optocoupler 15U2
15X4
Terminal strips
15X3

Analog conversion module

Flat-cable input module 10 inputs

Interference suppressor module

Interface distributor module

Amplifier module

Memory analog board module

Brake coupling module

Brake control module

Equipment zone ”Mounting rack / control devices”

397
Location diagrams ZSG Central control cabinet

Equipment zone D ”Flat cable mounting plate”


 The rectifier reduces the voltage from the
15V1 power supply board NTK 24 (in the REE) to
the supply voltage (22 V) for the signal lamps.

 Leading to the swing frame:


backplane of input/output plug-in unit EAR /
I/O 1 input/output auxiliary drive plug-in unit EHR

I/O 2  From each press unit, input and output cables


lead to the swing frame. The input/output
cables are fastened on the flat cable mounting
I/O 3
plate. Cable routing as shown in the sketch
opposite.
I/O 4
 Fixing clips

13,15 5, 6 3, 4 1, 2 11,12
Flat cables from the press units

Equipment zone ”Flat cable mounting plate”

398
Location diagrams ZSG Central control cabinet

Equipment zone E Swing frame”


Equipment of swing frame for presses with:

ÍÍÍÍ – 2 - 5 PUs, without Preset

ÍÍÍÍ
REE2 REE2 Computer plug-in unit 2

ÍÍÍÍ EHE2 Input/output

ÍÍÍÍ
EHE2 auxiliary drive plug-in unit 2

ÍÍÍÍ LTE Power part plug-in unit

ÍÍÍÍ  SSE2 Servo-drive plug-in unit 2

ÍÍÍÍ
ÍÍÍÍ
LTE – 2 - 5 PUs, with Preset

ÍÍÍÍ
REE2 Computer plug-in unit 2

ÍÍÍÍ
EHE2 Input/output
auxiliary drive plug-in unit 2
LTE Power part plug-in unit
Swing frame for presses with 2- 5 PUs  SSE2/LSE Servo-drive plug-in
unit 2/ power part plug-in unit for
brushless pile motors

Note:
The electronic boards must be in their respective
board slots. They must be correctly connected to
the connectors of the backplane. In front of each
plug-in unit the safety crossbar must be fitted.

399
Location diagrams ZSG Central control cabinet

Equipment of swing frame for presses with:

ÍÍÍÍ – 6 - 7 PUs, without Preset

ÍÍÍÍ
ÍÍÍÍ
REE2 REE2 Computer plug-in unit 2

ÍÍÍÍ
EAE Input/output plug-in unit
EAE

ÍÍÍÍ
HAE2 Auxiliary drive plug-in unit 2

ÍÍÍÍHAE2 LTE Power part plug-in unit

ÍÍÍÍ  SSE2 Servo-drive plug-in unit 2

ÍÍÍÍ
LTE
– 6 - 7 PUs, with Preset,

ÍÍÍÍ – 8 PUs, with Preset, without non-stop

ÍÍÍÍ
delivery

ÍÍÍÍ REE2
EAE
Computer plug-in unit 2
Input/output plug-in unit
Swing frame for presses with 6- 8 PUs HAE2 Auxiliary drive plug-in unit 2
LTE Power part plug-in unit
 SSE2/LSE Servo-drive plug-in
unit 2 / power part plug-in unit for
brushless pile motors
– 8 PUs, with Preset, with auxiliary pile at
the delivery
REE2 Computer plug-in unit 2
EAE Input/output plug-in unit
HAE2 Auxiliary drive plug-in unit 2
LTE Power part plug-in unit
 SSE2/LSE2 Servo-drive plug-in
unit 2 / power part plug-in unit for
brushless pile motors 2

Note:
The electronic boards must be in their respective
board slots. They must be correctly connected to
the connectors of the backplane. In front of each
plug-in unit the safety crossbar must be fitted.

400
Location diagrams ZSG Central control cabinet

Equipment of swing frame for presses with:

ÍÍÍÍ – 9 PUs, with Preset, without non-stop

ÍÍÍÍ delivery

ÍÍÍÍ
REE2
REE2 Computer plug-in unit 2

ÍÍÍÍEAE

ÍÍÍÍ
EAE Input/output plug-in unit

ÍÍÍÍ
EHE2 Input/output
EHE2 auxiliary drive plug-in unit 2

ÍÍÍÍ
ÍÍÍÍ
LTE Power part plug-in unit
LTE

ÍÍÍÍ
SSE2/LSE Servo-drive plug-in unit 2/

ÍÍÍÍ
power part plug-in unit for brushless
pile motors

ÍÍÍÍ – 9 PUs, with Preset, with auxiliary pile at


the delivery
Swing frame for presses with ≥ 9 PUs REE2 Computer plug-in unit 2
EAE Input/output plug-in unit
EHE2 Input/output
auxiliary drive plug-in unit 2
LTE Power part plug-in unit
 SSE2/LSE2 Servo-drive plug-in
unit 2/ power part plug-in unit for
brushless pile motors 2
 SSE2/LSE2 Servo-drive plug-in
unit 2 / power part plug-in unit for
brushless pile motors 2

Note:
The electronic boards must be in their respective
board slots. They must be correctly connected to
the connectors of the backplane. In front of each
plug-in unit the safety crossbar must be fitted.

401
Location diagrams ZSG Central control cabinet

Computer plug-in unit REE 2

 NTK24 Power supply board


 NTK5 Power supply board
 REK386 Processor board 386
 ESK_2 Input/ output control board
 SAK2 Memory analog board
 ESK_1 Input/ output control board
 REK1 Processor board
Computer plug-in unit REE
 SRK Power converter board

Note:
All electronic boards of the same type in the swing
frame are identical in design (e.g. power supply
boards NTK , input / output control boards ESK 2).
Boards of the same type are interchangeable.

ESK_2 Input/ output control board


The input/ output control board ESK_2 is required
for presses with ≥ 9 printing units.

REK386 Processor board 386


EPROM Computer The processor board 386 REK 386 consists of the
module motherboard computer motherboard RGP 3, the EPROM module
EPM and the RGPĆcomputer module RRM.

RGPĆcomputer
module

Layout of computer unit RGP3+RRM

REK1 Processor board


EPROM The processor board REK 1 consists of the computer
module motherboard RGP 2 and the EPROM module EPM.

Computer
motherboard

Layout of processor board REK1

402
Location diagrams ZSG Central control cabinet

Input/output auxiliary drive plug-in unit EHE 2

The input/output auxiliary drive plug-in unit EHE 2


is required for presses with:
– 2 - 5 printing units,
– ≥ 9 printing units.

 NTK5 Power supply board


 HAK2 Auxiliary drive board
 SEK Safety input board
Input/output auxiliary drive plug-in unit for  EAK2 Input/output board
presses with 2- 5 printing units from right to left for:
– feeder,
– delivery,
– central control cabinet,
– printing units 1 to 5.
 EAK2 Input/output board for printing unit 9

Note:
All electronic boards of the same type in the swing
frame are identical in design (e.g. power supply
boards NTK , auxiliary drive boards HAK 2,
Input/output auxiliary drive plug-in unit for input/ output boards EAK 2). Boards of the same
presses with ≥ 9 printing units type are interchangeable.

Input/output plug-in unit EAE

The input/output plug-in unit EAE is required for


presses with:
– ≥ 6 printing units.

 NTK5 Power supply board


 SEK Safety input board
.
 EAK2 Input/output board
from right to left for:
– feeder,
Input/output plug-in unit for
– delivery,
presses with ≥ 6 printing units
– central control cabinet,
– printing units 1 to 8.

Note:
All electronic boards of the same type in the swing
frame are identical in design (e.g. power supply
boards NTK , input / output boards EAK 2). Boards
of the same type are interchangeable.

403
Location diagrams ZSG Central control cabinet

Auxiliary drive plug-in unit HAE 2

The auxiliary drive plug-in unit HAE 2 is required for


presses with:
– 6 - 8 printing units.

 NTK5 Power supply board


 HAK2 Auxiliary drive board

Note:
All electronic boards of the same type in the swing
Auxiliary drive plug-in unit for presses with 6- 8 frame are identical in design (e.g. power supply
printing units boards NTK , auxiliary drive boards HAK 2). Boards
of the same type are interchangeable.

404
Location diagrams ZSG Central control cabinet

Power part plug-in unit LTE

The power part plug-in unit LTE is required for all

ÍÍ Í ÍÍ Í presses.

ÍÍ
ÅÅ ÍÅ ÍÍ
Å ÍÅ  LTK500 Power part board

ÅÅ Å Å Å
 LTK50 Power part board
 STK_2 Pile control board
 STK_1 Pile control board
Power part plug-in unit for presses with ≤ 7 printing
units, without Preset, with auxiliary pile at feeder Note:
and delivery All electronic boards of the same type in the swing
frame are identical in design (e.g. power part
boards LTK50, power part boards LTK500). Boards
of the same type are interchangeable.

ÍÍ Í ÍÍ Í ÍÍ
ÍÍ
Å ÍÅ ÍÍ
Å ÍÅ ÍÍ
Å
LTK50 Power part board

Å Å Å Å Å
The power part board LTK50 is only used for
presses with:
– 2 - 7 printing units, with Preset, with auxiliary
pile at the delivery,
– ≤ 7 printing units, without Preset, with auxiliary
Power part plug-in unit for presses with 8- 9 print-
pile at the delivery
ing units, with Preset, with auxiliary pile at the
feeder
STK_1 Pile control board

ÍÍ Í ÍÍ Í ÍÍ The pile control board STK_1 is used for all

ÍÍ
Å ÍÅ ÍÍ
Å ÍÅ ÍÍ
Å
presses except for those with:
– 8 - 9 printing units, with Preset, without

Å Å Å Å Å
auxiliary pile at the feeder.

STK_2 Pile control board


The pile control board STK_2 is only used for
Power part plug-in unit for presses with 8- 9 print- presses:
ing units, with Preset, without auxiliary pile at the – without Preset, with auxiliary pile at the feeder.
feeder

405
Location diagrams ZSG Central control cabinet

Servo-drive plug-in unit SSE2

The servo-drive plug-in unit SSE2 is required for


presses with:
– 2 - 4 PUs, without Preset (only one SSK 2),
– 2 PUs, without Preset, without CPC,
– 5 - 7 PUs, without Preset,

Servo-drive plug-in unit for a press with 2- 7 PUs,  NTK24 Power supply board
without Preset  SSK2 Servo-drive control board

Note:
All electronic boards of the same type in the swing
frame are identical in design (e.g. power supply
boards NTK , servo-drive control boards SSK 2).
Boards of the same type are interchangeable.

Servo-drive plug-in unit 2 /


power part plug-in unit for brushless pile
motors SSE 2/ LSE

Í
The servo-drive plug-in unit / power part plug-in unit

Í
for brushless pile motors SSE 2/ LSE is required for
presses with:

Å
Å
– 2 - 5 PUs, with Preset (only one NTK 24 and
two SSK 2s),
– 2 PUs, with Preset, without CPC,
– 6 - 7 PUs, with Preset,
Servo-drive plug-in unit/power part plug-in unit for – 8 - 9 PUs, with Preset, without non-stop
brushless pile motors for presses with 6- 7 PUs, delivery
with Preset

 NTK24 Power supply board


 SSK2 Servo-drive control board
 LTK500 Power part board
 BAK Brake control board

Note:
All electronic boards of the same type in the swing
frame are identical in design (e.g. power supply
boards NTK , servo-drive control boards SSK 2).
Boards of the same type are interchangeable.

406
Location diagrams ZSG Central control cabinet

Servo-drive plug-in unit 2 /


power part plug-in unit for brushless pile
motors SSE 2/ LSE

Í The servo-drive plug-in unit / power part plug-in unit

Í
for brushless pile motors SSE 2 / LSE2 is required

Å
for presses with:

Å
– 8 - 9 PUs, with Preset, with auxiliary pile at the
delivery

 NTK24 Power supply board


Servo-drive plug-in unit/power part plug-in unit for  SSK2 Servo-drive control board
brushless pile motors 2 for presses with 8 - 9 PUs,
with Preset, with auxiliary pile at the delivery  LTK50 Power part board
 LTK500 Power part board
 BAK Brake control board

Note:
All electronic boards of the same type in the swing
frame are identical in design (e.g. power supply
boards NTK , servo-drive control boards SSK 2).
Boards of the same type are interchangeable.

407
Location diagrams ZSP Central control console

ZSP Central control console

Layout

Fixing bolts for console plate

Console plate

Display control board DSK

Input / output module EAM

Display unit consisting of:


– display power supply board DNK
– display support plate
– control console display ZID
Support plate for:
A – transformer 13T1
B – connector 13X1
C – terminal strip 13X2

Hinged cover with opening for cables

Casing of central control console

Door

Overall view

408
Location diagrams Position switches

Position switches

2S29 1S29

2S28 1S28 11S37 11S34 11S31


11S65
11S56
2S25 2S26 1S25 1S26 11S40
2S25a 1S25a 11S32
2S25b 1S25b 11S38
2S24 1S24 11S38a
1S40a 11S4
2S20 2S37 11S38b
1S40
11S36
2S31

11S39

Preset feeder, printing units 1 and 2

12S55 12S55a

12S40 3...9S28
12S44
12S38 12S56 12S39 12S37 3...9S29
12S33
12S35 12S36 3...9S24
12S422) 12S130a 12S34 12S9
12S421) 12S130 12S65a
3...9S20
12S41 3...9S37
12S117
12B129a
12B129 12S34b 12S43
12S34a

1 Version with rake


2 Version with board

Delivery with coating unit

Legend:
Equipment O.S.
Equipment D.S.
Equipment which can be allocated neither to
the D.S. nor to the O.S.

409
Location diagrams Position switches

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
12S55 12S55a

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
12S44 12S40 3...9S28

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
12S68 12S37

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
12S56 3...9S29
12S35 12S36

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
12S34 12S37a 3...9S24
12S42 12S39 12S9

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
12S65a 3...9S20
12S411)

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
12S65 12S34b 3...9S37
12S412) 12S34a 12S43

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
12S9c 12S9b 12S9a

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
1 Version with rake
2 Version with board

Extended delivery with coating unit

Legend:
Equipment O.S.
Equipment D.S.
Equipment which can be allocated neither to
the D.S. nor to the O.S.

410
Location diagrams Solenoid valves

Solenoid valves

2Y56 1Y56

11Y74 11Y66
1Y45
15Y11 11Y16

1Y15
11Y15
2Y12 1Y12
1Y16

2Y48 1Y48

back
2Y2 1Y2 1Y50
2Y63 1Y44
2Y9 1Y9 1Y63 1Y52
2Y62 1Y54
2Y10 1Y10 1Y62 1Y55
2Y11 2Y61 1Y11 1Y61 1Y43
1Y42
2Y13 2Y7 1Y13 1Y7 front
2Y53 2Y51 1Y53 1Y51
2Y39/2Y40 1Y47 1Y39/1Y40 or

back
1Y52
1Y55
1Y42
1Y54
1Y43
front

Preset feeder, printing units 1 and 2

Legend:
Equipment O.S.
Equipment D.S.
Equipment which can be allocated neither to
the D.S. nor to the O.S.

411
Location diagrams Solenoid valves

12Y14/
12Y15
12Y11
12Y60/ 12Y49
12Y61
12Y13
12Y4
3...9Y12
12Y78 4...9Y67
3...9Y48

12Y62

Delivery with coating unit

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
12Y14/
12Y15

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
12Y11
12Y60/

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
12Y49
12Y61

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
12Y13
3...9Y12

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
12Y4
4...9Y67

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
3...9Y48
12Y78

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
12Y62

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ

Extended delivery with coating unit

Legend:
Equipment O.S.
Equipment D.S.
Equipment which can be allocated neither to
the D.S. nor to the O.S.

412
Location diagrams Motors

Motors

2MD 1MD
11M11
11M12
2M45 1M45 11M2 11M1
Lateral register Lateral register
11M6
2M1 1M1
2M6 1M6 1M4 11M7
1M8 11M5
2M5 1M5
Circumferen- Circumferen-
1M7
tial register tial register
11M3
M52 M51 1M2
1M4 1M3
11M9

11M8
1M9

Preset feeder, printing units 1 and 2

12M2

12M5 12M1 3...9M2

12M7 12M6
12M3

12M47 M44

Delivery with coating unit

Legend:
Equipment O.S.
Equipment D.S.
Equipment which can be allocated neither to
the D.S. nor to the O.S.

413
Location diagrams Motors

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
12M2

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
3...9M2
12M5 12M1

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
12M7 12M6
12M3

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
12M47 M44

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Extended delivery with coating unit

Legend:
Equipment O.S.
Equipment D.S.
Equipment which can be allocated neither to
the D.S. nor to the O.S.

414
Location diagrams Sensors

Sensors

2B43 2B32 1B43 1B32

15B14 11B10
11B35
1B11 11B55
1B13 1B9
2B48 1B48
2B48a 1B48a 1B10 11B33
HWI
1B49 11B11

Preset feeder, printing units 1 and 2

3...9B32

12B129

12B69
12B129a 12B65

12B77 12B47

Delivery with coating unit

Legend:
Equipment O.S.
Equipment D.S.
Equipment which can be allocated neither to
the D.S. nor to the O.S.

415
Location diagrams Sensors

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
3...9B32

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
12B129

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
12B69

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
12B129a 12B65

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
12B77 12B47

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Extended delivery with coating unit

Legend:
Equipment O.S.
Equipment D.S.
Equipment which can be allocated neither to
the D.S. nor to the O.S.

416
Location diagrams Control panels

Control panels

F F

C C

D D

A B

Preset feeder, printing units 1 and 2

H
C F
G

Delivery with coating unit

417
Location diagrams Control panels

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
H

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
C
F

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
G

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Extended delivery with coating unit

418
Location diagrams Control panels

Feeder

A Press control

B Pile control

Preset feeder

419
Location diagrams Control panels

Printing unit/coating unit

C Printing unit control O.S. D Printing unit/


coating unit control D.S.

F Dampening system control G Coating unit control D.S.

Printing unit/coating unit

420
Location diagrams Control panels

Delivery

H Press control

H Pile control

H Press display MID

Preset version

421
Location diagrams Control panels

H Dampening system control

H Fan and dryer control

Preset version

422
Location diagrams Operator’s controls

Operator’s controls

Description Feeder Printing/coating Delivery Remark


unit

Pushbutton ”Run” 11S2 12S2

Pushbutton ”Stop” 11S30 12S8

Pushbutton ”Production run” 11S19 12S60

”Emergency stop” button 11S1 1...nS1 (O.S.) 12S1


1...nS2 (D.S.)

Illuminated pushbutton 11S3 11S58


”Compressor on/off” 11H3 11H58

Illuminated pushbutton 11S7 12S59


”Feeder on/off” 11H7 12H59

Illuminated pushbutton 11S5 12S57


”Paper run on/off” 11H5 12H57

Pushbutton ”Fast” 11S20 12S6

Pushbutton ”Slow” 11S21 12S7

Pushbutton ”Forward” 11S17 1...nS3 (O.S.) 12S3


1...nS6 (D.S.)

Selector switch ”Safe” 11S18 1...nS4 (O.S.) 12S4


1...nS7 (D.S.)

Pushbutton ”Backward” 1...nS5 (O.S.) 12S5


1...nS8 (D.S.)

Signal lamp 11H51 12H9


”Malfunction press”

Signal lamp 11H1 1...nH1 12H1


”Malfunction feeder”
”Malfunction delivery”
”Malfunction printing/coating unit”
”Malfunction dryer”

423
Location diagrams Operator’s controls

Description Feeder Printing/coating Delivery Remark


unit

Illuminated pushbutton 12S63


”Job counter on/off” 12H63

Pushbutton 1...nS23
”Crawl speed”

Pushbutton ”Position” 1...nS17

Illuminated pushbutton 1...nS59


”Plate mounting” 1...nH59

Pushbutton ”Auxiliary pile down” 11S29 12S54

Pushbutton ”Auxiliary pile up” 11S28 12S53

Toggle switch 11S27


”Auxiliary pile on/off”

Pushbutton ”Main pile down” 11S25 12S46

Pushbutton ”Main pile up” 11S24 12S45

Pushbutton ”Pile stop” 11S26 12S124

Pushbutton 12S10
”Pile board on/off” 12H10

Pushbutton ”Removal of 12S11


inspection sheet” 12S11a

Press display MID

Illuminated pushbutton 1...nS57


”Inking form rollers on/off” 1...nS57

424
Location diagrams Operator’s controls

Description Feeder Printing/coating Delivery Remark


unit

Illuminated pushbutton 1...nS58


”Ink ductor on/off” 1...nH58

Pushbutton 1...nS22 12S17...


”+ dampening” 12S24

„Washing dampening/varnishing
rollers”
Illuminated pushbutton 12S25...
”– dampening” 12S32

Selector switch 1...nS21


”Adjusting dampening rollers”

Pushbuttons 11S117
”Blast air regulation” 11S118

Pushbuttons 11S44
”Suction head height” 11S44a
11S45
11S45a
Pushbuttons 11S46
”Suction head format” 11S47

Pushbuttons 11S58
”Main pile centering” 11S58a
11S59
11S59a
Pushbuttons 11S59
”Auxiliary pile centering” 11S60

Pushbutton 11S63
”Pile stops – larger format”
Pushbutton 11S62
”Pile stops – smaller format”
Pushbutton ”Pile stops D.S.” 11S9

Pushbutton ”Pile stops O.S.” 11S10

Pushbuttons 11S48
”Format wheels” 11S57

Pushbuttons 12S68
”Sheet slowdown format” 12S69

425
Location diagrams Operator’s controls

Description Feeder Printing/coating Delivery Remark


unit

Pushbuttons 12S61
”Sheet slowdown speed” 12S62

Pushbuttons 12S73
”Sheet jogger D.S.” 12S74

Pushbuttons 12S75
”Sheet jogger O.S.” 12S76

Potentiometer to DSM5
regulate the displayed fans

Potentiometer to DSM3
regulate the displayed fans

Potentiometer to DSM6
regulate the displayed fans

Potentiometer to DSM2
regulate the displayed fans

Potentiometer to DSM1
regulate the displayed fans

Potentiometer to DSM4
regulate the displayed fans

Pushbutton ”Dryer on/off”

Selector switch for dryer

Potentiometer to
regulate dryer output

Volume controller

Illuminated pushbutton
”Intercom”

Pushbutton 11S8
”Lifting the sheet stop fingers”

426
Location diagrams Operator’s controls

Description Feeder Printing/coating Delivery Remark


unit

Illuminated pushbutton 11S6


”Dampening rollers” 11H6

Pushbutton ”Suction air for suction 11S41


tape +”

Pushbutton ”Suction air for suction 11S42


tape –”

Illuminated pushbutton ”Turning 1...nS45


the ink fountain roller”

Varnish circulation

Varnish pump ON/OFF

Turning the pan roller

Draining the coating pan

Varnish flow rate to varnish pump

Spraying

Rinsing

Stopping the pan roller 2...nS57


2...nH57

Potentiometer ”Blast air at front 11R1


lays”

427
Location diagrams Operator’s controls

428
Location diagrams ZSP Control panel of control console

ZSP Control panel of control console

7 8 9
4 5 6
1 2 3
0

CPC

Control panel of central control console ZSP

 Selector buttons ”Unit” (from left to right):  ”Emergency stop” button




Entire press
Delivery
Button ”Stop”
– Printing unit  Command buttons (from left to right):
– Feeder – Presetting
– Job change
 Preselection display
– Progressives (colour separations)
 Actual value display – Washup
 Fine display of preselection/actual value
Command control buttons
display
Signal lamps (from left to right):
 Fault display: – Malfunction press (red)
– Press not ready to run – Malfunction control console (blue)
– Warning – Malfunction production run (yellow)
 Service display:  Button ”Page up/down” in the display


Central lubrication
Service 1
 Control console display
– Service 2  Numeric keypad
 Colour buttons CPC keys
(for presses without CPC equipment)
 Function buttons
Adjustment buttons

429
Location diagrams ZSP Control panel of control console

430
Abbreviations

Abbreviations

Abbreviation Description Abbreviation Description

AEM Drive extension module EAE Input/output plug-in unit


ANZ Display board EAK Input/output board
ATV Display and key distribution EAM Input/output module
board
EAR Backplane of input/output
ASE Job memory card unit plug-in unit
AUM Analog signal distribution EE Electronic plug-in unit
module
EEM Single-fault fail-safe
AVM Control and distributor module extension module
EGK External equipment board

BAK Brake control board EHE Auxiliary drive input/output


plug-in unit
BAM Brake control module
EHR Backplane of auxiliary drive
BEK Control unit board input/output plug-in unit
BFM Filter module of brushless ELK Mains discharge board
power part
ELR Backplane of electronic plug-in
BKM Brake/ clutch module unit
BLT Brushless power part EPM EPROM module
BSM Control unit interface module ESG Extension control cabinet
BVM Control unit distributor module ESK Input/output control board
ESM Interference suppressor
module
CSM CPC3 interface module
EVG Electronic ballast
CVK CPC3 distributor board
EVK Front-corner alignment control
EVM Input/output distributor module
DAM Double-sheet indication
EWK Extension board
module
DAK Digital output board EWM Extension module

DAS Speed ratio display system EXK External equipment supply


board
DBE Double-sheet detector
DGP Display motherboard
FAM Flat-cable output module
DLW Diskette drive
FCA Adaptor between telediagnosis
DNK Display power supply board board and CPC2S
DSK Display control board FCK Flash memory controller board
DSM Speed control module ”Fans” FDK Telediagnosis board

431
Abbreviations

Abbreviation Description Abbreviation Description

FEM Flat-cable input module LDM Air pressure sensor module


FKK Ink fountain board LG Light pen
FKV Ink fountain distributor LLM Power logic module
FÜK Sensor for overshooting-sheet LPM Varnish pump control module
control
LRM Power part control module
FVM Flat-cable connection module
LS Light barrier
FZA Ink zone display board
LSE Power part plug-in unit for
FZT Distribution board for ink zone brushless pile motors
keys
LSM Lamp control module
LSR Backplane of power part plug-
GKM Compact rectifier module in unit for brushless pile motors
GRM Rectifier module LTE Power part plug-in unit

GSM Rectifier module with fuses LTK Power part board


LTM Power part module
LTR Backplane of power part plug-
HAE Auxiliary drive plug-in unit
in unit
HAK Auxiliary drive board LUM Interconnection module
HAR Backplane of auxiliary drive LVM Air distributor module
plug-in unit
LVT Distribution box
HLM Auxiliary drive logic module
HSK Main drive control board
HSQ Sheeter MAE Motor drive plug-in unit

HTM Auxiliary drive driver module MAR Motor drive backplane

HVK Main current distributor board MCM Microcontroller module

HWI Encoder MEE Motor drive/electronic plug-in


unit
MID Press display
IDS Encoder MK Measuring head
ITF Terminal interface MOT Motor drive board
ITM IGBT driver module MRK Motor regulation board
IWM Earth-leakage monitor module MRM Measuring bar computer
module

KID Compact information display MSK Motor control board

KKM Heat sink module MSM Measuring bar sensor module

KLM Compact power module MWE Measured-value acquisition


board
KNT Compact power supply unit
MZK State indication board
KOK Communication board
KVM Terminal amplifier module
KVT Heat sink unit

432
Abbreviations

Abbreviation Description Abbreviation Description

NAM Mains connection module SBM Power bridge module

NEK Electronics supply board SDM Servo-drive pushbutton module

NSM Supplementary module of SEK Safety input board


power supply unit SEM Interface input module
NTE Power supply plug-in unit SIK Actual current measuring
NTK Power supply board board
NTM Power supply module SLA Suction air control

NTR Power supply backplane SLM Pile power module

NVK Mains supply board SLT Converter power part

NVM NV-RAM module SM Stepper motor

NVTE Power distributor of SMM Current measuring module


electronic plug-in unit SMR Stepper motor control board
SNT Chopper-type power supply
unit
PBK Back-up battery board
SPM Memory analog board module
PD Printer
SPR Voltage regulator
PEK Extension board for plate
image reader SPW Voltage selector switch
PRZ Processor board SRK Power converter board
PRM Plate position detection module SSA Serial interface adapter
PSL Positioning lamps SSE Servo-drive plug-in unit
PSM Profibus interface module SSK Servo-drive control board
PU Printing unit SSM Servo-drive distributor module
SSR Backplane of servo-drive plug-
in unit
REE Computer plug-in unit
STA Interface adapter
REK Processor board
STK Pile control board
REM Register module
STL Pile power part
RER Backplane of computer plug-in
unit STM Pile control module
RGP Computer motherboard STS Vacuum cleaner
RRM RGP computer module STT Supporting element of power
converter
RSK Plug-on control board
SUM Signal conversion module
RSM Plug-on control module
SVK Control voltage distributor
RWK Backplane board
SVM Interface distributor module
SAK Memory analog board SVT Connecting part of power
converter
SAM Interface output module
SW Voltage fluctuation relay
SAS Busbar system
SWM Setpoint module

433
Abbreviations

Abbreviation Description Abbreviation Description

TAM Button and display module ZRM ZSK computer module

TEM Tacho input module ZSG Central control cabinet

TLK Transistor power board ZSK Central control board

TML Terminal ZSP Central control console

TMP Buttons for manual positioning ZT Zenith terminal


of measuring head ZTK Central control board
TRK Transistor control board
TRM Transistor control module
TSK Driver/interface board
TSM Dryer control module
TTK Transistor driver board
TUM Keyboard coding module
TVK Key distributor board
TVM Encoder distribution module
TVS Tacho signal distribution
system

UFK Filter board


USM Interconnection module
UVM Converter and distributor
module

VEN Fan
VMM Distributor for measuring
module
VP Distributor board
VSM Amplifier module
VTL Distributor board for diskette
drives
VTR Distributor board
VVK Ballast supply board

WDM Resistance decade module

ZID Control console display


ZMM Double current-measuring
module

434
Equipment identification

Equipment identification

To be able to clearly identify the electrical equip-


ment, the following equipment identification is used:

Press model

Identification letter or
Position code Number
abbreviation

Where on the press ... ? Which equipment ... ? Distinguishes equip-


ment of the same type

Example 1: 1LVT1

1 LVT 1

PU1 Distribution box 1st distribution box


(main distributor)

Example 2: 1S3

1 S 3

Printing unit 1 Switch Consecutive number of


here: pushbutton ”Forward” switch on PU 1

Example 3: E4

Blank E 4

Cannot be allocated Other equipment: Consecutive number


to any unit motor / pneumatic system compressor

Note:
– If a field of the equipment identification is not
required or not defined, it is left blank.
– In most cases the consecutive number
corresponds to the inputs or outputs of the
associated EAK.

435
Equipment identification

436
Position codes

Position codes
Overview of position codes

The position code indicates on which unit of the


press the equipment in question is located.

The position codes 1 to 10 are reserved for


the printing units or the coating unit.

1 Printing unit 1

2 Printing unit 2 or coating unit

3 Printing unit 3 or coating unit

4 Printing unit 4 or coating unit

5 ... 10

11 Feeder

12 Delivery

13 Central control console

14 Sheeter HSQ

15 Central control cabinet ZSG

16 Extension control cabinet ESG

20 Dryer

101 Control unit CPC1

Example:
Position codes on a Speedmaster

15
4 3 2 1

12
101 13 11

Speedmaster SM102

437
Position codes

438
Index

Automatic sheet arrival control 11M3


Index – Activation and inactivation, 239
– Block diagram, 238
– Graphical representation, 240
– Preset version, 247
A – Checking the operating range, 250
– Interconnection diagram, 248
Abbreviation, 435 – Place of installation, 247
Abbreviations, 431 – Removal and installation, 249
Adjustment of format wheels 11M4, 47 – Technical data, 247
– Checking the operating range, 52 – Sheet alignment, 238
– Fault message, 47 – Sheet arrival control, 239
– Interconnection diagram, 49 – Standard version, 241
– Place of installation, 48 – Checking the operating range, 246
– Removal and installation, 50 – Interconnection diagram, 242
– Technical data, 48 – Place of installation, 241
Adjustment of pile support plate 11M8, 31, 33 – Removal and installation, 243
– Checking the operating range, 37 – Technical data, 241
– Interconnection diagram, 34 Autoplate, 267
– Place of installation, 33 – Block diagram, 269
– Removal and installation, 35 – Fault display, 268
– Technical data, 33 – Method of functioning, 267
Adjustment of printing pressure 1...nM5, 85 – Sequence of functions, 270
– Checking the operating range, 95 auxiliary pile detection 11B11
– Interconnection diagram for CU, 89 – checking the circuit state, 151
– Interconnection diagram for PU, 88 – connection, 150
– Place of installation, 87 – layout, 149
– Removal and installation of motor, 90 – place of installation, 149
– Removal and installation of potentiometer, 92 – removal- and installation, 150
– Technical data, 87 – setting, 151
Adjustment of pull lays 1M7/1M8, 96 – task and function, 150
– Automatic positioning, 96 auxiliary pile motor 11M2
– Checking the operating range, 103 – layout, 146
– Interconnection diagram 1M7, 99 – pin assignment, 148
– Interconnection diagram 1M8, 100 – place of installation, 146
– Place of installation, 98 – task and function, 147
– Precision adjustment of pull lay, 97 – Technical specifications, 147
– Removal and installation, 101 auxiliary pile motor 12M2
– Technical data, 98 – layout, 192
Admission of pressure, pneumatic system 15Y11 – pin assignment, 194
– Pin assignment, 352 – place of installation, 192
– Place of installation, 351 – Task and function, 193
– Task, 351 – Technical specifications, 193
Air supply cabinet E8, 381
Automatic misalignment control 11M7
– Activation and inactivation, 252
– Block diagram, 251 B
– Checking the operating range, 257 Blanket washup device GTW, 281
– Graphical representation, 253 Blast air regulation at feeder 1M9, – Manual blast air
– Interconnection diagram, 255 setting, 360
– Place of installation, 254 Blast air regulation at the feeder 1M9
– Removal and installation, 256 – Block diagram, 357
– Sheet alignment, 251 – Characteristic–curve–dependent blast air regulation,
– Technical data, 254 358
automatic pile transport 11B35 – Checking the operating range, 367
– checking the circuit state, 157 – Layout and task, 362
– connection, 156 – Pin assignment, 363
– Layout, 155 – Place of installation, 361
– place of installation, 155 – Removal and installation, 364
– -removal and installation, 156 – Technical data, 363
– task and function, 156 Block diagram, – Sheet alignment, 207
Blower bar, – see blower motor for dampening system,
322

1
Index

Blower motor for dampening system M45, 322 Place of installation, 271
Blower motor for powder spray device 12M35, 377 Removal and installation, 272
bottom main pile limitation 11S34 Coarse register monitoring 1...nB48, – Task/function,
– checking the circuit state, 159 272
– place of installation, 158 Coating unit, – Position code, 437
– setting, 159 Control console
– task and function, 158 – Layout, 408
bottom main pile limitation 12S34 – Location diagrams, 408
– checking the circuit state, 206 Control panel ZSP, – Location diagrams, 429
– place of installation, 204 Control panels
– setting, 205 – Delivery, 421
– task and function, 204 – Feeder, 419
Brushless main motor from 37KW, 12 – Location diagrams, 417
– Printing unit/coating unit, 420
Cooling and circulating unit E40, 325
C Cover guide height adjustment 1M4, 67
– Checking the operating range, 76
Central control cabinet ZSG, 393 – Interconnection diagram, 70
– Equipment zone A ”Power supply”, 394 – Place of installation, 69
– Equipment zone B ”Partition wall”, 395 – Positioning, 67
– Equipment zone C ”Mounting rack / control devices”, – Removal and installation of motor, 71
397 – Removal and installation of potentiometer, 73
– Equipment zone D ”Flat cable mounting plate”, 398 – Technical data, 69
– Equipment zone E ”Swing frame”, 399
– GRM Rectifier module, 396
– Location and layout, 393
Central dampening solution supply E40, 325 D
Central lubrication, 329 Dampening, 321
– Basic concept, 329 Dampening solution mixing unit E41, 328
– Fault messages, 332 Dampening system
– Grease lubrication – Blower motor, 322
– Block diagram, 333 – Dampening solution sensor, 323
– Function, 334 Delivery, – Position code, 437
– Layout, 334 delivery pile control
– Monitoring the lubrication system, 335 – automatic pile height control, 170
– Motor for grease lubrication 12M47, 345 – auxiliary drive control, 165
– Place of installation, 334 – block diagram (Preset), 161
– Pressure relief valve of the motor , 337 – block diagram (standard), 162
– Settings, 336 – non–stop operation, 177
– Triggering a lubrication process, 336 – overview (Layout), 163
– Oil lubrication – overview of components (drive side), 167
– Block diagram, 338 – overview of components (operator side), 166
– Changing the filter, 342 – overview of motors, 168
– Distributing lubrication, 340 – overview of solenoid–operated valves, 169
– Filter unit, 341 – overview of switches and sensors, 168
– Function, 340 – paper blockage, 185
– Layout, 339 – press control, 164
– Place of installation, 339 – removal of sample sheet, 184
– Pressure relief valve of oil pump, 342 – safety circuit, 164
– Triggering a lubrication process, 341 – Transport of auxiliary pile, 175
– Service display, 330 – transport of main pile (Preset), 171
changeover fast/slow 12B65 – transport of main pile (standard), 173
– checking the circuit state, 197 delivery upper edge of pile 12B129
– connection, 196 – checking the circuit state, 203
– layout, 195 – connection, 202
– place of installation, 195 – layout, 201
– -Removal and installation, 196 – place of installation, 201
– task and function, 196 – -removal and installation, 203
Circumferential register SM/CD 102, 314 – task and function, 202
Coarse register monitoring, 271 Diagonal register SM/CD 102, 308
Adjustment, 273 Double–sheet detector 1B11
Connection, 271 – Adjustment, 237
Layout, 271 – Block diagram, 231

2
Index

– Connection, 235 I
– Fault messages, 232
– Layout, 234 Identification letter, 435
– Pin assignment, 235 Impression cylinder washup device DZW, 292
– Place of installation, 233 – Block diagram, 292
– Removal and installation, 236 Inactivating pile centering 11B55, 28
– Sheet alignment, 231 Ink blade, – Sensor monitoring the ink blade 1...nB43,
303
Ink fountain roller motor SM/CD 102, 305
Inking roller washup device FWW, 286
E Inking unit temperature control, 382
Encoder, – Place of installation, 388 – SM/CD 102, 317
Encoder IDS, 388 Inking unit temperature control E39, E39a, – SM/CD
– Installation variants, 390 102, 318
– Pin assignment, 389 Intercom WSA
– Removal and installation, 390 – Function, 387
Equipment identification, 435 – Layout, 386
Extension control cabinet ESG, 437 IR slide–in dryer, – Switches monitoring the IR slide–in
dryer 12S9, –a, –b, –c, 380

F
Feeder, – Position code, 437
L
Feeder pile control Lateral register SM/CD 102, 311
– block diagram (Preset), 119 Level in coating pan L–B32, 371
– block diagram (Standard), 120 Location diagrams, 393
– Overview of components (Standard), 125 – Control panel ZSP, 429
feeder pile control – Control panels, 417
– automatic pile height control of auxiliary pile , 129 – Delivery, 421
– automatic pile height control of main pile (standard), – Feeder, 419
128 – Printing unit/coating unit, 420
– auxiliary drive control, 123 – Motors, 413
– non–stop operation (Preset), 134 – Operator’s controls, 423
– non–stop operation (standard), 137 – Position switches, 409
– overview (layout), 121 – Sensors, 415
– Overview of components (Preset), 124 – Solenoid valves, 411
– overview of motors, 126 – ZSP Central control console, 408
– overview of switches and sensors, 126 Location diagrams , – Central control cabinet ZSG, 393
– pile height control of main pile (Preset), 127 Lubrication monitoring 1 – 12B47, 348
– press control, 122 Lubrication monitoring 2 – 12B77, 348
– safety circuit, 122
– transport of auxiliary pile, 132
– Transport of main pile, 130 M
Format adjustment
– Adjustment of format wheels 11M4, 47 M1 Direct–current main motor, 7
– Adjustment of printing pressure 1...nM5, 85 Main drive
– Cover guide height adjustment 1M4, 67 – Brushless main motor from 37KW, 12
– Pile stops 11M11/11M12, 59 – Direct–current main motor, 7
– Sheet joggers 12M6/12M7, 110 – Motor terminal board, 15
– Sheet slowdown/format adjustment 12M5, 104 – Replacing the brake, 9
– Suction head/format adjustment 11M6, 53 – Replacing the carbon brushes, 10
– Rotor position encoder, 13
main pile motor (Preset) 11M1
– layout, 140
G – pin assignment, 142
Grease lubrication, 333 – place of installation, 140
– Lubrication monitoring 1 – 12B47, 348 – task and function, 141
– Lubrication monitoring 2 – 12B77, 348 – technical specifications, 141
GRM Rectifier module, – Central control cabinet ZSG, main pile motor (standard) 11M1
396 – Layout, 143
– pin assignment, 145
– place of installation, 143
– task and function, 144
– Technical specifications, 144

3
Index

main pile motor 12M1 (Preset) – Sensor 11B10, 20


– layout, 186 – Sensor 11B55, 29
– pin assignment, 188 – Servo–drive ”Pile centering” 11M9, 21
– place of installation, 186 Pile centering 11M9, 23
– Task and function, 187 – Checking the operating range, 27
– Technical specifications, 187 – Interconnection diagram, 24
main pile motor 12M1 (standard) – Place of installation, 23
– layout, 189 – Removal and installation, 25
– pin assignment, 191 – Technical data, 23
– place of installation, 189 pile height control 12B69
– Task and function, 190 – checking the circuit state, 200
– technical specifications, 190 – connection, 199
Malfunctions in printing unit, 268 – Layout, 198
Misalignment control 11M7, – Misalignment control, 252 – place of installation, 198
Monitoring the ink blade, sensor 1...nB43, 303 – -removal and installation, 199
– Connection, 304 – setting, 200
– Layout, 303 – Task and function, 199
– Pin assignment, 304 Pile merging, 31
– Place of installation, 303 – Adjustment of pile support plate 11M8, 31
– Removal and installation, 304 Pile stops 11M11/11M12, 59
– Task, 304 – Checking the operating range, 66
Monitoring the IR slide–in dryer, – Switches 12S9, –a, – Fault message, 60
–b, –c, 380 – Interconnection diagram 11M11, 62
Motor for grease lubrication – Interconnection diagram 11M12, 63
– Pin assignment, 345 – Place of installation, 61
– Place of installation, 345 – Prepiling, 60
Motor terminal board, 15 – Removal and installation, 64
Motors – Technical data, 61
– Blower motor for powder spray device 12M35, 377 Pin assignment
– Location diagrams, 413 – Servo–drive circumferential register SM/CD 102, 315
– Washup brush motors M43, M50 ... M56, 296 – Servo–drive diagonal register M4 SM/CD 102, 309
Motors / functional units, – Servo–drive diagonal register – Servo–drive ink fountain roller SM/CD 102, 306
SM/CD 102, 308 – Servo–drive lateral register SM/CD 102, 312
Motors / motor–driven units Coarse register monitoring, 271
– Servo–drive circumferential register SM/CD 102, 314 Plate clamping device
– Servo–drive ink fountain roller SM/CD 102, 305 – Autoplate, 267
– Servo–drive lateral register SM/CD 102, 311 1...nB53 Coarse register monitoring, 271
Pneumatic system, – Admission of pressure, pneumatic
system 15Y11, 351
N Pneumatic system compressor E4
– Pin assignment, 355
Number, 435 – Technical data, 355
Position code, 435
Position codes, 437
O Position switches, – Location diagrams, 409
Oil lubrication, 338 Potentiometer, 308
– Pressure monitoring oil lubrication 1F33 (1 bar), 346 Powder spray unit 12E2, 373
– Pressure monitoring oil lubrication 1F34 (12 bars), Powdering cycle switch 12S68, 379
347 Pressure monitoring oil lubrication 1F33 (1 bar), – Place
Oil pump M44, 343 of installation, 346
– Pin assignment, 344 Pressure monitoring oil lubrication 1F34 (12 bars), –
– Place of installation, 343 Place of installation, 347
Operator’s controls, – Location diagrams, 423 Pressure sensor pneumatic system 15B14
– Pin assignment, 354
– Place of installation, 353
Print–free margin 1M2/1M3
P – Checking the operating range, 84
Pan roller motors 1...nM1, 321 – Interconnection diagram, 79
Pile centering, 17 – Place of installation, 78
– Activation and inactivation, 18 – Removal and installation of motor, 80
– Block diagram, 17 – Removal and installation of potentiometer, 81
– Sensor ”Inactivating pile centering” 11B55, 28 – Technical data, 78
– Sensor ”Pile centering” 11B10, 19 Print–free margin D.S./O.S. 1M2/1M3, 77

4
Index

Printing unit, – Position code, 437 – Pile stops 11M11/11M12, 59


Pull lay control 1B9/1B10 – Sheet joggers 12M6/12M7, 110
– Block diagram, 223 – Sheet slowdown/format adjustment 12M5, 104
– Checking the sensing distance, 230 – Suction head height adjustment 11M5, 40
– Place of installation, 226 – Suction head/format adjustment 11M6, 53
– Sheet alignment, 223 Servo–drive circumferential register SM/CD 102, 314
– Sheet infeed error/pull error, 224 Servo–drive diagonal register SM/CD 102, 308
Preset version, – Adjustment, 227 Servo–drive ink fountain roller SM/CD 102, 305
Standard version, – Adjustment, 229 Servo–drive lateral register SM/CD 102, 311
Sheet alignment, 207
– Automatic misalignment control 11M7, 251
R – Automatic sheet arrival control 11M3, 238
– Block diagram, 207
Rotor position encoder, 13 – Degree values, 209
– Layout, 13 – Double–sheet detector 1B11, 231
– Pin assignment, 13 – Pull lay control 1B9/1B10, 223
– Sheet alignment control, 210
Sheet alignment control
S – Adjustment, 219
Sensor ”Inactivating pile centering” 11B55 – Block diagram, 210
– Adjustment, 29 – Misaligned–sheet display (trend display), 214
– Check, 29 – Sheet alignment, 210
– Place of installation, 29 – Sheet alignment error
Sensor ”Pile centering” 11B10, 20 – ANK sensors, 212
– Check, 20 – FÜK sensors, 213
– Place of installation, 20 Sheet alignment control 1B13/1B49, 215
– Removal and installation, 20 – Checking the circuit state, 222
Sensor for dampening solution control B32, 323 – Layout and task, 215
Sensors – Pin assignment, 215
– Admission of pressure, pneumatic system 15Y11, – Place of installation, 215
351 – Removal and installation, 216
– at the washup solution container B1, B54, B55, 301 Sheet joggers 12M6/12M7, 110
– Adjustment, 302 – Checking the operating range, 117
– Connection, 301 – Fault message, 111
– Pin assignment, 301 – Interconnection diagram 12M6, 113
– Place of installation, 301 – Interconnection diagram 12M7, 114
– Removal and installation, 302 – Place of installation, 112
– Level in coating pan L–B32, 371 – Removal and installation, 115
– Location diagrams, 415 – Technical data, 112
– Monitoring the ink blade 1...nB43, 303 Sheet monitoring, 259
Sensors/switches, 1...nB53 Coarse register monitoring, – Sheet travel monitor 1...nB48/1...nB48a, 259
271 Sheet slowdown / format adjustment 12M5
Service display – Checking the operating range, 109
– Grease lubrication, 331 – Interconnection diagram, 107
– Oil lubrication, 330 – Place of installation, 106
Service display Washup, 278 – Removal and installation, 108
– Functions of the blanket washup device, 278 – Technical data, 106
– Functions of the impression cylinder washup device, Sheet slowdown/format adjustment 12M5, 104
278 – Fault message, 105
– Functions of the inking roller washup device, 279 Sheet travel monitor 1...9B48/1...9B48a, 259
Servo–drive – Adjustment, 263
– Adjustment of format wheels 11M4, 47 – Components, 263
– Adjustment of pile support plate 11M8, 33 – Place of installation, 262
– Adjustment of printing pressure 1...nM5, 85 – Service display, 261
– Adjustment of pull lays 1M7/1M8, 96 Size adjustment, 45
– Automatic misalignment control 11M7, 251 – Block diagram, 45
– Automatic sheet arrival control 11M3 – Command ”Presetting”, 46
– Preset version, 247 – Print–free margin D.S./O.S. 1M2/1M3, 77
– Standard version, 241 Solenoid valves, – Location diagrams, 411
– Blast air regulation at the feeder 1M9, 357 Static electricity eliminator 11E3, – Task, 385
– Cover guide height adjustment 1M4, 67 Static electricity eliminator 12E3
– Pile centering 11M9, 21, 23 – Layout, 384

5
Index

– Place of installation, 383 – Settings, 294


Suction head height adjustment 11M5, 39, 40 – Inking roller washup device FWW
– Checking the operating range, 43 – Additional washing of printing plate and ink foun-
– Interconnection diagram, 41 tain roller, 289
– Place of installation, 40 – Block diagram, 286
– Removal and installation, 42 – Example, 289
– Technical data, 40 – Flow chart, 290
Suction head height control, 39 – Function, 287
– Suction head height adjustment 11M5, 39 – Layout, 287
Suction head/format adjustment 11M6, 53 – Settings, 288
– Checking the operating range, 58 – Messages, 276
– Fault message, 54 – Selection of functions, 275
– Interconnection diagram, 56 – Service display, 278
– Place of installation, 55 – Washup solution container, – Warnings, 298
– Removal and installation, 57 Washup solution container E9
– Technical data, 55 – Block diagram, 297
Switches – Layout, 299
– Monitoring the IR slide–in dryer 12S9, –a, –b, –c, – Pin assignment, 300
380 – Place of installation, 299
– Powdering cycle 12S68, 379 – Sensors B1, B54, B55, 301
– Task, 300
– Warnings, 298
T
Temperature control, – SM/CD 102. Siehe
Farbwerk–Temperierung Z
Zentralschmierung, – Oil lubrication, – Circular
lubrication, 340
U Zero position
– Servo–drive circumferential register SM/CD 102, 316
upper main pile limitation 11B33 – Servo–drive diagonal register SM/CD 102, 310
– checking the circuit state, 154 – Servo–drive ink fountain roller SM/CD 102, 307
– connection, 153 – Servo–drive lateral register SM/CD 102, 313
– Layout, 152
– place of installation, 152
– removal and installation-, 153
– setting, 154
– task and function, 153

V
Varnish supply unit E4a, 369

W
Washup brush motors M43, M50 ... M56, 296
– Pin assignment, 296
– Place of installation, 296
Washup devices
– Blanket washup device GTW
– Block diagram, 281
– Example, 285
– Flow chart, 285
– Function, 282
– Layout, 282
– Settings, 284
– Control by command, 275
– Impression cylinder washup device DZW, 292
– Example, 295
– Flow chart, 295
– Function, 293
– Layout, 293

You might also like